Sunteți pe pagina 1din 542

TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

VERSION 1.0 BASIC MEASUREMENT TRAINING WORKBOOK FARO LASER TRACKER JANUARY 2008 STUDENTS BOOK

CAM2 MEASURE

FARO Technologies Inc. 2005-2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission of FARO Technologies Inc. FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE FARO LASER TRACKER AND ITS MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN AS-IS BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE FARO LASER TRACKER OR ITS MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of FARO Technologies Inc.

FaroArm CAM2 SPC Graph and SPC Process are registered trademarks of FARO Technologies Inc. Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft, Inc. DATAPAGE is a registered trademark of Brown & Sharpe, Inc. Pro/ENGINEER is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation. CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes. Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.

FARO Technologies, Inc. Internal Control File Locations: F:\CONTROL\REFERENC\08PRODUC\ENGLISH\Prdpub13\08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - January 2008.pdf F:\CONTROL\RECORDS\05MANUFA\PARTSPEC\XH17-0361.pdf

Course Introduction: This course will explain DIRECT (Dimensional Inspection Reverse Engineering and Control Tool) applications of FARO Laser Tracker. This course is designed to provide the basic skills necessary to measure a part, check a part, and compare measurements to nominal CAD files. There will be lectures, as well as hands-on exercises that will allow you to practice the skills that you have learned.

E 1
P3

C 8 9 F 7
P1

2 10 3 4 5 G

P4

A 6

P2

S1

S2

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Course Checklist
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts
FARO Laser Tracker Safety
Laser Radiation Emission Laser Aperture Labels Laser Emission Indicator Rear Composite Label Lifting the Tracker Pinch Points Hot Plugging EMC Warning

Care of the FARO Laser Tracker

Understanding Measurement Accuracy


Effects of Atmospheric Conditions Environmental Effects Targets Physical Changes in the Part or Stand Backsight Readings Measurement Strategy

Optical Target Care Cleaning the Optical Targets Standard SMRs and RetroProbes (Silver Coated) Economy SMRs (Gold Coated) Break Resistant SMRs (Gold Coated) Cleaning the Trackers Optics Storage Transportation

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview


FARO Laser Tracker Setting up the FARO Laser Tracker Important Topics - Hardware Overview
FARO Laser Tracker Specifications Smart Warm-up Powering Down

Chapter 3: Hardware Overview Practical


Practical Exercise

Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X


Using this manual Starting CAM2 Measure X Screen Layout
i

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008 Graphics Field DRO Window Pull-down Menus Toolbar Buttons Output Control Bar Status Bar Control Bars About CAM2

CAM2 Measure X HELP Hotkeys - Viewing Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad) Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse) Hotkeys - Commands Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation


Operational Checks Compensations
Quick Backsight Self Comp Pointing Compensation ADM When to Perform

Operational Checks Important Topics - Laser Checks and Compensation

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical


Practical Exercise
Compensations Self Comp Pointing Pointing Compensation ADM Operational Checks Static Repeatability Dynamic Repeatability

Chapter 7: Feature Measurement


Types of Features
2D Features 3D Features

ii

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Compensation

Review Features
Printing Erasing

Plane Compensation Compensation of a 2D Feature

Important Topics - Feature Measurement

Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical


Practical Exercises
Execute Mode View Control Review Features

Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements


Coordinate Systems Alignments Feature Reducibility Constructions Dimensions
What is a Construction? Common Constructions What is a Dimension? Tricky Dimensions What is a Coordinate System?

Feature Reducibility Exercise

Important Topics - Basic Part Measurement

Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical


Practical Exercise
Setting the Alignment Feature Measurements Constructions Changing Labels from Review Features Dimensions Printing and Saving a Text Report Save The Measurements Additional Coordinate Systems Switching between coordinate systems. Save Again

Chapter 11: Checking a Part


Nominals
What is a Nominal? Types of Nominals iii

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008 CAD to Part Alignments CAD=Part

Important Topics - Checking a Part

Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical


Practical Exercise
Getting the Nominals Setting the Alignment Save The Measurements Measuring Features and Adding Nominals Adding a Nominal through Review Features Printing and Saving a Text Report Save Again

Chapter 13: Move Device Position


Purpose
Moving the Device Realign the Part to the Device

Important Topics - Move Device Position

Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical


Practical Exercise
Importing CAD File Setting the Coordinate System Save The Measurements Measure Features for the Move Device Position Performing the Move Device Position Command

Add Measurements to an Existing Feature

Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks


The Measurement Track
Examine the Task Setup Considerations Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment Data Collection Data Output Other Hints

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD


Why Work with CAD? CAD Terminology
Types of CAD Data Standard CAD Data File Formats IGES 3DM VDA iv

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Measurement Template Iterative Alignment (Best Fit) Automatic Nominal Association Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD

Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical


Practical Exercise
Translating an IGES File Measuring the Alignment Features Setting an Iterative Alignment Save The Measurements Measure the Remaining Features Modifying On-Screen Labels Printing and Saving a Text Report Save Again

Chapter 18: Surface Measurement


Why Measure a Surface? Surface Measurement Commands
Inspect Surface Surface Edge Point Surface Point Home In Point

Important Topics - Surface Measurement

Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical


Practical Exercise
Translating and Adding the CAD data Measuring and Creating an Alignment CAD=Part Save the Measurements Checking a Surface Checking an Edge Using Home In Points Printing and Saving a Text Report Save Again

Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical


Practical Exercise
Measuring and Creating an Alignment CAD=Part Scan Measurement Preference Parallel Lock Planes Show Surface Deviation Rescale Whiskers Printing and Saving a Text Report v

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measurement


Point Measurements
Comp Off and Comp Axis High Point and Low Point

Surface Measurements Important Topics - Point Measurement

Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical


PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement
Measuring the Alignment Features Constructing the Alignment High Points Home-in Options Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K Three Coordinates, Select Surface Three Coordinates, Sample Surface Save the Home In File Measure the Home In Points

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement


Sheet Metal Measurements
Simple Features Unique Sheet Metal Measurements Surface Points CAD Side and Other Side Dynamic Nominals

Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture Measurement

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Constructing Nominals Using the Measurement Template Iterative Alignment Compare to Straight Nominal Edge Compare Nominal Circles Compare Nominal Round Slots Compare Nominal Surfaces

Chapter 25: Round Tubing


Tubing Part Preferences Measure Tube
Round Tube Rectangular Tube Tube Fitting

vi

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Construct Tube
Enter XYZ Enter PTB From Features Breakpoints Importing Data

Tube Reporting

Important Topics - Round Tubing

Tube Correction Report

Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical


Practical Exercise
Measuring a Tube Printing and Saving a Text Report

Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical


Practical Exercise
Preparing the Learn Execute file Start Programming Constructing a Nominal Tube Construct Tube Points Measuring a Tube Tube Alignment Printing a Report End Learn.

Chapter 28: Tool Building


Tool Building
DRO Window Dynamic DRO Window

Important Topics - Tool Building

Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical


Practical Exercise
Aligning to the CAD Iterative Alignment Import Model Creating a DRO window on a Nominal Positioning the Bracket Recording the Tool Position

Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions


Geometric Characteristics and Symbols Form Dimensions
vii

Orientation Dimensions
Parallelism Perpendicularity Concentricity

True Position Dimensions

Important Topics - Advanced Dimensions

RFS (Regardless of Feature Size) MMC (Maximum Material Condition)

Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical


Practical Exercise
Constructing Nominals Creating a Nominal Alignment Measure the Datum Features Constructing the Measured Alignment Position Dimensions Printing and Saving a Text Report Save The Measurements

Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning


What is Scanning? Why Scan? Scanning Options
Freehand Scan Lock Planes Editing Scan data

Important Topics - Introduction to Scanning

Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical


Practical Exercise
Measuring and Creating an Alignment CAD=Part Save the Measurements Scan Measurement Preference Freehand Scanning (2D) Parallel Lock Planes

Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation


Learn Mode
On-Line Learn Off-Line Learn

Execute Mode Important Topics - Measurement Automation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical


Practical Exercise
Translating and Adding CAD Start Learning Measure Alignment/Datum Features Creating an Alignment Constructions and Dimensions Generating a Report End Learn. Execute Mode

Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical


Practical Exercise
Translating and Adding CAD Start Learning Add Alignment/Datum Features Adding an Alignment Measuring Features Adding Constructions and Dimensions Generating a Report End Learn Execute Mode

Chapter 37: Measurement Automation


Learn Mode Execute Mode
Display Results Online or Offline?

Important Topics - Measurement Automation

Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical


Practical Exercise
Selecting Units and Default Tolerances Start Programming Constructing the Measured Alignment Printing a Report Modifying and Saving Your Learn file Execute Mode

ix

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator


SoftCheck Tools
Taking Pictures Image Creator The Green Ball 3D Effects Independent Comments

Hot Keys for Image Creator Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures

Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical
Practical Exercise
Taking and Importing Images Adding the Green/Red Balls Creating Images, Icons and Reports Saving the Image List Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure Execute the SoftCheck Tool

Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager


Using the SoftCheck Tool Manager
Navigating the SCTM Main Screen Tool List Administrator

Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool Manager

Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Transferring SCTs to a New Computer SoftCheck Tool Setup

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting


Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph Advanced Chart Options Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting
Using Pictures from a Digital Camera Chart Types

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical


Practical Exercise
Modify the Learn/Execute Program Creating Test Data for SPC Graph Creating a SPC Graph Template Align Icons Adding a Preview to the Program

Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems


Feature Reducibility
3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems Coordinate Systems Change Coordinate System Discussion

Important Topics - Intermediate Alignments

Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical


PRACTICAL Exercise
Measuring the Alignment Features Setting an Iterative Alignment 3-2-1 Separate Origin Perpendicular Intersect Bore Line-Line Midpoint 3 Point 3 Plane Set Active Coordinate System Change Coordinate System Rotation Translation

Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System


Calculated Coordinate System CAD=Part Constructions Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate Systems
2 Offset Line 3 Offset Plane

Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Nominal Alignments on the CAD Construct the Plane Construct the Plane xi

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 January 2008 Construct the Line Complete the Coordinate System Verify Alignment

Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments


Feature Alignment Iterative Alignment with Surface Points Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part Alignments
When to Use This Technique Watch Out!

Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values
Measurement Template Using Surface Points Using Surfaces as Nominals

xii

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts


FARO Laser Tracker Safety
The FARO Laser Tracker outputs a visible red laser beam. The source of the red light is a Helium Neon (HeNe) laser (Xi), or an instant-on pointer beam (X), which have an output of 1 milliwatt max/cw and are classified as a Class II laser. You should avoid direct exposure to your eye at all times even though the human blink reaction to bright light provides a natural mechanism of protection to this visible laser beam. The FARO Laser Trackers also have an XtremeADM beam, which is an invisible infrared laser. The source of this beam is a distributed feedback (DFB) laser with less than 0.79 milliwatt output, and is classified as a Class I laser. This laser is harmless to your eye. This equipment is classified as a Class II laser product and meets the requirements of the Food and Drug Administration, Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Register 21 CPR parts 1000 and 1040, and those of the international standard IEC EN 60825-1 2001-08. The FARO Laser Tracker is certified to comply with the protection requirements of the Council Directives 89/336/EEC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) and 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive on Electrical Safety) on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility, as amended by 93/68/EEC. CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. The user must adhere to work safety laws as stated in UVV BGV B2, January 1993.

1
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Laser Radiation Emission


When operating, a laser beam is emitted from the aperture on the tracker. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the laser beam aperture.

LASER APERTURE

FIGURE 1-1 Laser Aperture

Laser Aperture Labels The aperture warning labels indicate where laser radiation emits from the tracker. See Figure 1-2 for the locations of these labels. They contain the words, AVOID EXPOSURE, Visible and/or invisible laser radiation is emitted from this aperture.

AVOID EXPOSURE Visible and/or invisible laser radiation is emitted from this aperture

FIGURE 1-2 Laser Warning Labels on Aperture

2
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Laser Emission Indicator The emission indicator on the front of the tracker illuminates when the laser is energized and operating. See Figure 1-3 for the location of the laser emission indicator.

LASER EMISSION INDICATOR

OK

LASER TRACKER

FIGURE 1-3 Laser Emission Indicator

Rear Composite Label


The composite label, located on the back of the tracker, combines the Working Logotype Label, the Certification Label and the Identification Label into one. See Figure 1-4, Rear Composite Label. The top portion is the Working Logotype, which is required on all Class II laser products. It contains the wording: LASER RADIATION, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. 633-635 nm Laser, 1 milliwatt max/cw. CLASS II LASER PRODUCT. Underneath the Working Logotype is the Certification. It contains the wording: PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS UNDER THE FOOD, DRUG AND COSMETICS ACT AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARD IEC 60825-1 2001-08.

3
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 The bottom portion of the rear composite label contains the Identification, which indicates the model number, the serial number, and the manufacturing date of your tracker.
!

CAUTION
LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 633-635 nm Laser 1 milliwatt max/cw CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

WORKING LOGOTYPE

PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS UNDER: THE FOOD, DRUG, AND COSMETICS ACT AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARD IEC 60825-1 2001-08 LISTING # E112555 COMPLIES WITH UL/CSA/IEC 61010-1 TEST & MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT

CERTIFICATION

US and Worldwide Patents Pending

Calibration Sticker Here

Inspection Sticker Here

Serial Number: L03000201023 Manufactured: Nov. 25, 2005


FARO Technologies, Inc. 125 Technology Park Lake Mary, FL 32746 U.S.A.

IDENTIFICATION

FIGURE 1-4 Rear Composite Label

Lifting the Tracker


A safety label is located on the rear of the tracker above the rear lifting handle. Follow safe lifting procedures when removing the tracker from its shipping containers. Always use safe lifting procedures when placing the tracker on, or removing the tracker from, the instrument stand. See Figure 1-5 for the location of the safety label.

FIGURE 1-5 Lifting Label

Use the two handles on the front of the Tracker when removing it from the shipping container. Use the upper front and back handles when mounting and carrying the tracker.

4
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Pinch Points
Located on both the frontsight and the backsight side of the tracker's center eyewheel, two labels indicate pinch points. Avoid placing hands and fingers in these locations. See Figure 1-6 for the location of the pinch point labels.

FIGURE 1-6 Pinch Point Labels

Hot Plugging
On the back of the tracker above the cable connection socket is the hot plugging caution label. See Figure 1-7 for the location of the hot plugging caution label.

CAUTION
Connect/disconnect cable only with POWER OFF

FIGURE 1-7 Hot Plugging Label

The cable connects the Tracker to the Master Control Unit. CAUTION: Do Not connect or disconnect this cable while power is applied to the Master Control Unit.

5
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

EMC Warning
Keep the Tracker and External Temperature Sensor cables separate from any other cables in the area in order reduce the likelihood of cross-coupled interference. Two way RF hand held transmitters may generate interference into the system. Do Not use these devices near the Laser Tracker during measurements. One-way RF transmitters, such as the RF Remote and Voice System sold by FARO Technologies, Inc., do not cause interference.

Care of the FARO Laser Tracker


Use care in handling the FARO Laser Tracker system, especially while moving it from and one place to another. There are no user replaceable parts.

Optical Target Care


Optical Targets are an important part of the FARO Laser Tracker Systems. Handle them with great care to ensure their accuracy and longevity. Target care includes: Never touching the optical surfaces of the target. Never dropping the target. Keeping the target free of dust and moisture by storing it in the case. Cleaning the target only when necessary.

If the Tracker does not lock onto the target, use the Operational Checks command to check your SMR. If the Return Power value is GOOD your SMR does not need cleaning. CAUTION: Unnecessary cleaning will degrade the reflective surface of the SMR. Cleaning the Optical Targets In many cases, the optical surfaces of the target are simply dusty and just require cleaning with compressed air. CAUTION: Do Not clean with compressed air available from a hose in a workshop - this is seldom clean and may coat the SMR with oil or some other contaminant.

6
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Spray the air away from SMR for a few seconds before spraying it onto the optical surfaces. NOTE: Always hold the can upright and never shake the can when spraying compressed air. If the target is still not functional after blowing off any dust, use the following target specific procedures. CAUTION: Never use a dry cotton swab or tissue to clean the optical surfaces because these will scratch the optical surfaces. Cleaning with any improper chemicals will destroy the reflective surface. Standard SMRs and RetroProbes (Silver Coated) 1. Breathe on the optical surfaces. 2 Gently slide a cotton swab in one direction while rotating it in the opposite direction. Use one cotton swab for each pass and then discard it. You may need several swabs to clean the optical surfaces thoroughly. If this does not successfully remove the residue, clean the optical surfaces with Optima Grade Acetone. Moisten a clean cotton swab with Acetone. Gently slide the cotton swab in one direction while rotating it in the opposite direction. Remove any remaining cotton dust with canned compressed air.

3 4 5 6

Economy SMRs (Gold Coated) 1. Moisten a clean cotton swab with the Optima Grade Acetone. 2 3 Gently slide the cotton swab in one direction while rotating it in the opposite direction. Remove any remaining cotton dust with canned compressed air.

Break Resistant SMRs (Gold Coated) 1. Moisten a clean soft tissue with the Optima Grade Acetone. 2 3 Gently place the moistened tissue on the optical surface and slowly pull it across. Remove any remaining tissue lint with canned compressed air.

7
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Cleaning the Trackers Optics


The trackers aperture window and the embedded target covers may occasionally need cleaning. Remove any dust from the window using canned compressed air. If more cleaning is necessary, use water vapor and a clean cotton swab in the same manner as the SMRs (above). If water vapor does not successfully remove the residue, then use denatured alcohol.

Storage
When storing for long periods of time, pack the tracker in its shipping cases to protect it from environmental hazards, dust and dirt. Store the tracker in an environment where it will not be subject to extreme temperatures, environmental conditions, or heavy vibrations.

Transportation
When transporting the tracker around a shop floor, keep it mounted on a heavyduty stand with wheels. Before moving the tracker, fully lower the tripods extension tube. Avoid any divots or large gaps in the floor. Do not slide the stand and tracker across the floor - lower the tripods wheels to raise the tripod off the floor. When transporting the tracker long distances or between facilities, pack the tracker in its shipping cases. Always place the shipping cases on a pallet when using a forklift, and gently lift and lower the pallet.

Understanding Measurement Accuracy


As a general rule of the thumb, plan a measuring session to achieve accuracy equal to 10% of the smallest tolerance of the part. This is known as the 10 to 1 rule. For example, if the smallest tolerance on your part is 1.0 mm, the measurement device should be accurate to at least 0.1 mm. In order to determine the uncertainty associated with a particular measuring session, carefully estimate the contribution of errors from all identifiable sources. However, since the effects of some environmental factors are difficult to quantify, good metrology practice requires that the effects of all sources of error be minimized or eliminated. If the effects of environmental errors are left completely uncontrolled, the accuracy of the measurements may degrade to such an extent that the entire measuring session has to be rejected. Whenever

8
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 possible, measure your part in a location where environmental factors are closely controlled and kept stable.

Effects of Atmospheric Conditions


As the temperature, barometric pressure, and relative humidity of air change, so does its index of refraction. A 1 part per million change in the index of refraction occurs for a 3 mmHg change in pressure, a 1C in temperature, or a 40% change in relative humidity at 40C. The index of refraction cannot be calculated correctly without the current atmospheric condition values. Your Tracker is equipped with weather sensors that measure the temperature, pressure and humidity of the air around the tracker every five seconds. Thermal gradients, air turbulence, or air pockets of different temperatures in the path of the laser beam will affect the direction of the laser beam, and cause errors in the angular measurement taken by the Tracker. Avoid these errors, by not measuring near heating and air conditioning ducts, or any other source of these thermal effects.

Environmental Effects
Environment Effects such as excess vibration, mounting stability, and temperature can affect the accuracy of the measurements. Whenever possible, eliminate these outside factors. Do not move heavy objects near the part before or during a measurement session. The magnitude of the effect depends largely on the weight of the object and the stability of the workshop floor foundations. In some cases, the floor may shift enough to disrupt measurement sessions for days after an object has been moved. Support the part in the same manner for measurement as its intended function. This ensures that differential loading does not result in distortions in the part when it is put to use. For high accuracy measurements, power up the Tracker in the environment before measuring and allow it to reach thermal stability in the local environmental conditions. For high accuracy work, use redundant readings for each measurement. Taking redundant reading provides a means of detecting gross errors or blunders, may reduce the environmental effects that you have not been able to eliminate, and provides better statistical sampling. For example, measure a planar surface with more than three readings.

9
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Targets
Regularly check the target nest and the SMR for metal filings or debris that prevent the target from seating in the nest. Dimensional inaccuracies of target offsets are a frequent source of error during a measurement session. Check the Probe settings to select any additional tooling before measuring.

Physical Changes in the Part or Stand


Regularly inspect the Tracker stand and the Part to make sure that both remain stable throughout measuring. Any unknown change to the position of the Tracker stand and the Part degrades the measurement accuracy. Radiant energy from the sun, hot lights, or space heaters during measurement can introduce non-uniform expansion in the measurement equipment or the part, and degrades the measurement accuracy. Whenever possible, shield the Tracker and the Part from external heat sources.

Backsight Readings
The Tracker reads the azimuth and zenith angles, and the distance to the target for each reading in a measurement. The readings are compensated using a kinematic model. The model has parameters for the laser's four degrees of freedom (two rotational and two translational), and two parameters for the gimbal (axis offset and axis non-squareness). Verify the Tracker accuracy using the backsight checks. These checks compare a point reading taken in frontsight mode with one taken in backsight mode. The resulting deviation reports twice the worst-case error for a point measured at the range and position of the backsight reading. The error in a backsight reading is effectively error that is not compensated for by the kinematic model. Although the kinematic model is highly effective in minimizing tracker measurement error, there are still many factors that are not accounted for by the model. Target quality, atmospheric induced errors, and thermal expansion are some of the errors that are not addressed by the model. Most of these errors are taken into account in formulating the specification for the tracker.

Measurement Strategy
Understanding how the Laser Tracker measures can play an important role in achieving high accuracy results. Tracker measurements are comprised of two angular and one distance measurements. The distance accuracy specifications are higher than the angular specifications. This means that if the features 10
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 measured with the tracker are measured primarily in line with the path of the beam, and very little angular encoder movement the accuracy will be higher than features measured primarily with the angular encoders. The example of a scale bar measurement can be used to illustrate this. If a scale bar is placed horizontally in front of the tracker, the distance between points at either end of the bar will be measured predominantly with the azimuth encoder. If the bar is placed in line with the laser beam, the distance will be measured primarily with the distance measurement. The accuracy achieved in the horizontal case will be within the specifications of the tracker system, however, the accuracy achieved in the in-line case will likely be much higher. In fact, a well aligned tracker can measure with interferometer accuracy when the angular measurements are minimized. Setting up the tracker to minimize the angle in a measurement session is a good way to improve accuracy. This must be weighed against making the distance too great. When setting up to measure a rectangular part, the best position for the tracker would be a couple meters away from the end of the rectangle. If the rectangle is over 15 meters long, it may be better to move the tracker to the side of the rectangle, but still close to one end. Placing the tracker in the middle of the long side of the rectangle would result in an angular measurement volume of over 120 degrees compared with only a 30 degree volume from the end.

11
Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview


OBJECTIVE The instructor will demonstrate all the necessary cable connections and prepare the FARO Laser Tracker for measuring. After completing this exercise the student will know the proper mounting techniques for the Laser Tracker.

FARO Laser Tracker


The FARO Laser Tracker has a number of advantages over conventional metrology equipment. It offers high accuracy measurements over a volume, its compact and lightweight tracking head may be mounted either vertically or horizontally or even upside down. It is quick to set up and to relocate, and a single person may easily operate it. The exact equipment may differ from the equipment used in class today. However, these are a few common components for the Laser Control Station system.

FARO Tracker measuring head. Master Control Unit (MCU). High Accuracy Level Sensor - Allows for leveling measurements to gravity. Remote Air Temperature Sensor. Optical Targeting with Compensation Kit -Includes one 1.5 Spherically Mounted Retroreflector (SMR), tripod, and tripod Adapter. Remote Control Unit - This wireless RF remote control unit may be used by the operator to control the FARO Tracker system. CAT5 cross wired 100MHz patch cable with RJ45 connectors. FARO CAM2 Measure Software CD. FARO LASER Tracker User Manual. FARO CAM2 Measure Users Guide. Quick Release Mandrel Mount - Allows for quick vertical mounting to an instrument stand. NIST traceable certification for the thermistor, pressure sensor and humidistat.

The FARO Tracker head is shipped in a storage container by itself. The Master Control Unit, cables, SMRs, tooling, and mounting hardware are shipped in a second storage container.

13
Chapter 2: Hardware Overview

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Setting up the FARO Laser Tracker


The FARO Laser Tracker is designed for mounting on an instrument stand in the vertical or positions (horizontal positions require the Tracker Side Mount Fixture). The tracker will operate in any orientation. NOTE: The expanding mandrel mount is designed to hold the tracker in only the upright vertical position, or in the horizontal position when used in conjunction with the Tracker Side Mount Fixture (optional). When mounting the tracker upside down, it needs to be screwed directly into a mounting fixture. To setup the Tracker follow these steps: 1 2 3

Place the instrument stand on a stable floor surface, away from obstructions. Ensure that the instrument stand is resting on its adjusting pins. Use the supplied spanner wrench to tighten the quick release mandrel to the instrument stand.

NOTE: It is not recommended that the tracker be placed on a stand that is tilted more than 10 from vertical. 4

Grasp the handles located on the front of the tracker and remove the FARO Tracker from the container.

NOTE: Never grasp the beam steering assembly of the FARO Tracker as this can cause damage. 5 6 7 8 9 10

Place the Tracker on the instrument stand by means of the mandrel mount inserted into the tracker base. Turn the locking lever clockwise (when viewed from above) by hand until it is tight. The tracker is now locked in position. Connect the air temperature sensor to the MCU. Connect the communication cable to the socket on the back of the tracker and to the socket on the left side panel of the MCU. Connect the computer to the MCU using the Ethernet cable. Connect the power cord into the MCU and then connect to the power source.

NOTE: Making the connection in this order will ensure the machine is not damaged due to hot plugging the cable. 14
Chapter 2: Hardware Overview

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Apply power to the FARO Laser Tracker by turning on the switch at the right side of the MCU.

Smart Warm-up
Immediately after applying power to your tracker, your tracker will start performing a Smart Warm-up. During this time, the blue light on the front of the tracker will and the Azimuth and Zenith motors will be turned on. This process will continue until the tracker has reached the correct temperature, which is related to the ambient temperature. NOTE: A tracker that has been stored in an air conditioned environment, and is brought out to a hot environment, will take longer to warm-up than a tracker that has been stored in the hot environment. After the motors have raised the temperatures of the tracker, they will shut off and the tracker will spend minutes allowing the internal temperature to equilibrate. When the process has completed, the blue light on the front of the tracker will stop blinking and the tracker can be initialized using the Startup Checks. While measurements can be taken immediately after initializing the tracker, it may take up to one hour for complete temperature equilibrium in a thermally stable environment. If measurements need to be taken immediately, you should check the Backsights, using CompIT, after the tracker has been on for one hour.

Powering Down
The following steps should be followed to power down the tracker: 1 2 3 4 5 6

Exit CAM2 Measure. Store the SMR and/or any other targets in their protective cases. Power down the tracker using the switch on the right side of the MCU and disconnect the power cable from outlet. Disconnect the communication cable from the socket on the back of the tracker and from the socket on the side of the MCU. Disconnect the air temperature sensor from teh MCU. Disconnect the CAT5 100 MHz RJ-45 cable from the side of the MCU and the computer.

15
Chapter 2: Hardware Overview

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Loosen the locking lever on the tracker mandrel and carefully remove the tracker head from the stand by grasping its handles, and store it in the tracker head container.

Important Topics - Hardware Overview


FARO Laser Tracker Specifications
Size Tracker HeadMaster Control Unit Weight Tracker Head HeadMaster Control Unit 20 - 22 kg (40 - 44 lbs.) 5 kg (12 lbs) 280 x 554 mm (11 x 21 3/4 in.) 160 x 180 x 280 mm (6 x 7 x 11in.)

Environmental (Intended for Indoor Use Only) Operating Temperature Altitude Humidity Electrical Master Control Unit Fuses 88~264 VAC 47~63 Hz, 575 VA max. 250V IEC 60127-2 5x20mm US: 5A Slow-blow, EU: 2.5A Slow-blow
FIGURE 2-1 FARO Laser Tracker Specifications

4C (40F) to 43C(110F) 1000 below Sea Level to 2000 meters 0 to 95% non-condensing

16
Chapter 2: Hardware Overview

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 3: Hardware Overview Practical


Practical Exercise
Practice the setup and packing of the FARO Laser Tracker/CAM2 Measure X system, or the FARO Control Station System.

17
Chapter 3: Hardware Overview Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X


Objective - The instructor will introduce the CAM2 Measure X user interface. After completing this section the students will be able to customize the system and hardware settings.

Using this manual


The practical sections of this manual include step by step instructions that instruct you in every step of the process. For example, when we want you to select a command, you will see the following text. 1

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

You should use the mouse to select the command from the pull-down menu bar.

FIGURE 4-1 Selecting commands from the menu

After selecting any command, you will see messages in the Output control bar at the bottom of the screen.

19
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Starting CAM2 Measure X


Select CAM2 Measure X from the Windows START button. If the tracker has not been initalized, CAM2 Measure X will perform StartUp Checks automatically.

FIGURE 4-2 CAM2 Measure X Startup Checks

Select the units: inches, or millimeters. This creates a new file on the screen. NOTE: The units cannot be switched during the measurement session. The default Part Preferences automatically load, these set the decimal places, tolerances, report formats, and other part related preferences. You can use CAM2 Measure X without a measuring device. This is often called using CAM2 Measure X off line.

Screen Layout
2 5 3

4 6

1 3 5 7

Graphics Field Digital Read Out (DRO) Pull Down menu Control Bars

2 Toolbar Buttons 4 Output Bar 6 Status Bar

FIGURE 4-3 Screen Layout

NOTE: This figure above shows the default setup, but you customize the screen layout by dragging the toolbars and control bars. 20
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Graphics Field
The major portion of the CAM2 Measure X screen is consumed by the graphics field. This is the area that displays the measurements, and CAD data.

FIGURE 4-4 Graphics Field

DRO Window
The Digital Readout (DRO) Window displays the current coordinate information from the measuring device. This window is located at the top of the CAM2 Measure X window. You can move and size the window with the mouse. Hide the window by pressing the D key on the computer keyboard. Press the D key again to display the DRO Window. These keyboard keys are referred to as in CAM2 Measure X. There are many more hot keys listed in the back of this section.

FIGURE 4-5 Digital ReadOut

Pull-down Menus
On the top of the screen there is a pull-down menu bar. All the CAM2 Measure X commands can be accessed from the menu bar using the mouse.

FIGURE 4-6 Pull-down menu bar

21
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Toolbar Buttons
Along the top of the screen are the toolbars. Toolbars consist of with pictures that represent the different commands. If the mouse is hovered over a button for a few seconds a tool tip appears describing the function of the tool bar button. A longer description also appears at the bottom of the screen in the Status Bar.

FIGURE 4-7 Toolbar Buttons

Output Control Bar


On the bottom of the screen is the Output Control Bar. Instruction for appears here, so take a look at it often. The Output the Control Bar appears automatically when new text is added by the program, and will collapse after a few seconds.

FIGURE 4-8 Output Control Bar

Status Bar
On the very bottom of the screen is the Status Bar. The description of the highlighted command appears on this bar, as well as the current units and the XYZ location of the cursor in the CAD coordinate system.

FIGURE 4-9 Status Bar

22
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Control Bars
Along the left side of the screen are the three Control Bars. The Navigator, Saved Views, and CAD Parts bars provide quick access to some of the more commonly used commands.

FIGURE 4-10 Control Bars

CAM2 Measure X HELP


CAM2 Measure X uses a standard Windows HTML Help file. You can search through the help file by utilizing contents, index, or a keyword by using each tab on the left side of the Help window. The CAM2 Measure XUser Manual is also available on the User Manual CD-ROM. You can view, search, and print the electronic file (*.pdf) using Adobe Acrobat Reader software.

About CAM2
About CAM2 Measure X displays the version, build number and FARO Customer Service contact information.

FIGURE 4-11 About CAM2

23
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hotkeys - Viewing
Keys Command Zooms In i Zooms Out o Reset the View, or Zoom All e Arrange Labels l Pan WUXV Device View a Top View ^ Side View % Front View $ Isometric View ) Center View C+t S+A+E Full Screen Increase Whisker Scale S++ Decrease Whisker Scale -

24
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)


Keys Command Zooms In Zooms Out Pan Rotate around X Counterclockwise Rotate around X Clockwise Rotate around Y Counterclockwise Rotate around Y Clockwise Rotate around Z Counterclockwise Rotate around Z Clockwise

+ 8462 7 9 1 3 0 .

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a key which switches a section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size keyboard.

Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)


Keys Command Dynamic Zoom Dynamic Zoom Dynamic Pan Dynamic Rotate

S and drag the Right Mouse button


Mouse Wheel Button

C and drag the Right Mouse button CS and drag the Right Mouse button

25
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hotkeys - Commands
Keys Command Help Cancel Measure a Comp Off Point Measure a Comp Axis Point Measure a Plane Measure a 2D Line Measure a Circle Measure a Cylinder Measure a Sphere Turns off the DRO (digital read out) Change SMR Reset Interferometer (FARO Laser Tracker Only) Set Distance Mode (FARO Laser Tracker Only) Search (FARO Laser Tracker Only) Switch between Single Point and Scan Mode Material Thickness (Sheet Metal commands only) Collect Reading Compensation Point Remove Reading

G ! d p t n s x m I H B
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

26

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X


Use the toolbar buttons, or the pull-down menu bar to access commands. CAM2 Measure X runs both with or without a FaroArmTracker. CAM2 Measure X translates IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5, Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS file formats. For other CAD formats, use Rhino software to import your file and save as an OpenNURBS file. Never turn off the computer while CAM2 Measure X is running.

27
Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the procedure to perform adjustments to maintain the accuracy of the FARO Laser Tracker. After completing this section the student will be able to maintain the FARO Laser Tracker accuracy.

Operational Checks
Operational checks are performed to test the accuracy and of the tracker over the working volume. The Operational Checks determine the operating condition of the tracker as well as verify that environmental factors such as air movement and vibrations will not degrade measurement accuracy. They consist of a series of measurement procedures designed to verify Laser Tracker performance.

Compensations
The FARO Laser Tracker must be regularly and properly checked to ensure measurement. FARO CompIT will be used to compensate for the trackers deviations caused by shipping and other environmental factors.

Quick Backsight
The Quick Backsight Check is the first step in verifying the accuracy of the Tracker. The Quick Backsight Check determines if the tracker should be compensated to achieve higher accuracy. The Quick Backsights procedure allows the operator to check backsight anywhere in the trackers measurement volume. This makes it possible to check the error during the course of any inspection without having to move or rotate the tracker. Quick Backsights should be performed once per day prior to the measurement session, and during the measurement session as desired.

Self Comp
FARO CompIT will be used to compensate for the trackers deviations caused by shipping and other environmental factors. The Quick Backsight Check is the first step in verifying the accuracy of the Tracker. If the results of the Quick Backsight Check show that the Tracker requires compensation, the Self Comp routine should be run. 29
Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 FARO Self Comp is the primary method used for compensating the FARO Tracker. The Self Comp procedure requires no operator input, it will run automatically. If further adjustment is required, the other FARO CompIT procedures have been designed so that the operator can follow the on screen prompts during the compensation procedures.

Pointing Compensation
This compensation procedure determines and for backsight errors and error in the angular encoders. The pointing test consists of two procedures. Interim Test (IT) - The IT prompts the user to take measurements at predetermined locations to calculate the backsight error. Upon completion of this test, the results will be displayed with either a Pass or Fail situation. Pointing Compensation - If a tracker fails the IT, the pointing compensation needs to be performed to compensate the tracker for backsight error. The procedure is performed in the same was as the IT test, but with more points.

ADM
If the Tracker is equipped with ADM capability, it is recommended that this test is done weekly. The test procedure will vary depending on the model tracker. Interim Test (IT) - For the Xi model the IT directs the operator to move the SMR to predetermined locations to compare the distance measurement of the Inferometer and ADM laser. Upon completion of this test, the results will be displayed with either a Pass or Fail situation. For the X model, the test compares the distance between two points from different tracker locations. A scale bar can also be used for this test if the tracker cannot be moved.

30
Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Operational Checks
Operational checks are performed to test the of the tracker over the working volume. The Operational Checks determine the operating condition of the tracker as well as verifying that environmental factors such as air movement and vibrations will not degrade measurement accuracy. They consist of a series of measurement procedures designed to verify Laser Tracker performance.

When to Perform
Operational Checks should be performed after the tracker has been moved to a new operating environment to ensure that the environment and setup will not affect the measurement accuracy. NOTE: If the Laser Tracker is consistently used in the same stable environment, Operational Checks do not need to be run on a regular basis. As a comfort factor, they can be performed occasionally to verify that the environment hasnt changed. General Page This page monitors the ambient conditions from the MCU and external temperature sensors. It also checks the Return Power - the strength of the laser signal as the beam travels from the laser source to the SMR and back. This value will be low if the SMR is dirty and needs to be cleaned. Repeatability Page This page is used to check the of the measurement system.

Closure - Tests the interferometers ability to repeat the distance to a known point. Failure to repeat may indicate a damaged SMR or a tracker that isnt functioning properly. Static Repeatability - Measures the ability of the tracker to obtain the same measurement value for a given point. Failure to repeat may indicate instability of the tracker or the part. Dynamic Repeatability - Measures the ability of the tracker to obtain the same measurement value for a given point while moving the SMR throughout the measurement volume. Failure to repeat may indicate instability of the reference point, tracker, or instrument stand.

31
Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Laser Checks and Compensation


CompIT allows the operator to optimize the laser tracker to perform accurate measurements. ADM Interim test will run differently on the different model trackers. Self Comp is the primary method for compensating the tracker. It requires no input from the operator.

32
Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical


Practical Exercise
This exercise will perform the most common Compensation checks to optimize the measurement performance of the tracker. Operational Checks will be used to verify the tracker in a stable environment. There are indicator lights on each side of the Trackers aperture. A solid green light indicates that the tracker knows the distance between the tracker and the SMR. The red light will come on when the tracker is acquiring data. When the green light is blinking, the radial distance is not known. In ADM measurement mode, acquire the beam with the target by holding the SMR in the beam path for the Tracker to reacquire the distance. In Interferometer measurement mode, the Tracker must be sent to a reset location such as the Home (TMR - Tracker Mounted Reset) position on the tracker head.

Compensations
The FARO CompIT software is used to fine tune the tracker parameters that change during normal use and operation of the tracker. NOTE: FARO CompIT assumes that a 1.5 SMR is being used for all compensation routines described here. If the beam is broken during this process the Auto-Home feature will send the tracker back to look for the SMR in its home position and the test is re-started from the first point. 1 2

From the DEVICES menu, select HARDWARE CONFIG. From the HARDWARE CONFIG dialog, select COMPIT.

FIGURE 6-1 FARO CompIt

33
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Quick Backsights 1

From the COMPIT program, click the BACKSIGHTS button.

FIGURE 6-2 Backsights

2 3 4 5

Asterisks in the Desired column indicate that the user may move the SMR and tracker to any desired location. Position an SMR Nest on a stable surface or on the object being measured. The calibration tripod supplied with the tracker may be used. Remove the SMR from the TMR (Tracker Mounted Reset or Home position) and track to the reference point. Click the MEASURE button.

The tracker will wait for stability of the SMR before taking a measurement. 6

Once the target is stable, the Tracker will measure the point in frontsight and backsight.

NOTE: If the SMR does not stabilize within 60 seconds an error will appear. If this happens, check the stability of the SMR and the tracker and try again 7

The difference between the two measurements is calculated and displayed as Backsight Error.

When the backsight measurements are completed at this location FARO CompIT will prompt the user to move the SMR to another location. 8 9 10

Track the SMR to a second location. Click the MEASURE button. Track the SMR to a third location. 34

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11 12 13


Click the MEASURE button. Click the CONTINUE button. Quick Backsight Check Results will be displayed.

The results of the Interim Test are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided. NOTE: If desired, select Details to view the results of the Interim Test and select Report to save the results to a text file. 14

Click the DONE/CANCEL button to exit.

NOTE: If a Pass condition is obtained, select Done to exit the test, or to proceed with the Pointing test select the More button. If a Fail condition is obtained, cancel and run Self Comp.

Self Comp
1 2

From the COMPIT program, click the SELFCOMP button. The FARO tracker will compensate for backsight error. No user input is required.

FIGURE 6-3 Self Comp Results

Pointing
Pointing CompIT is divided into two parts: the Interim Test and the Pointing Compensation. Interim test The interim test will determine if the Pointing Compensation is needed.

35
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1

From the FARO COMPIT program, select POINTING.

FIGURE 6-4 Pointing

2 3

The operator must move the SMR to the location indicated by the DESIRED column. Place the SMR in the calibration tripod or in another stable nest at this location.

NOTE: Move the SMR and/or rotate the tracker until the numbers for all three values appear green. 4 5 6 7

The tracker will wait for stability of the SMR before taking a measurement. Once the target is stable the Tracker will measure the point in both frontsight and backsight. When the backsight measurements are completed at this location FARO CompIT will prompt to move the SMR to the next location Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the next 2 locations.

NOTE: After the prescribed locations are finished, FARO CompIT allows the user to measure backsight error at optional user-defined locations. 8 9 10 11

Click the CONTINUE button after all locations have been measured. The results of the Interim Test are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided. If a PASS condition is obtained, click the DONE button to exit the test, or proceed to the Pointing test by selecting the CONTINUE button. If a FAIL condition is obtained, click the CONTINUE button to proceed with the Pointing Compensation. 36

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Pointing Compensation
12 13 14 15 16 17

Repeat steps 2 to 6 as instructed. The results of the Pointing Compensation are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided. Click the DETAILS button to review the results of the test. Click the CLOSE button to exit the DETAILS dialogue. If the results read PASS, click the UPDATE button to apply the compensation parameters and exit the Pointing CompIT. If the results read FAIL, click the CANCEL button and repeat the test.

NOTE: If the Pass criteria are not met after repeating the test contact FARO Customer Service for further instructions.

ADM
There are two different ADM Interim Tests for the two different Laser Tracker models. The Interim Test for the Xi model compares ADM measurements to IFM measurements. For the X model the Interim Test compares two distance measurements between two points. The Interim Test for the Xi model is shown below. Interim test Use the ADM Interim Test to verify the accuracy of the ADM. It should be run at least once a week. 1

From the FARO COMPIT program, select ADM.

FIGURE 6-5 ADM Interim Test

37
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 3

Desired column indicates that the target should be at the specified distance away but in any angle. Place the SMR in the calibration tripod or in another stable nest at this location.

NOTE: Move the move SMR and/or rotate the tracker until the distance values appear green. 4 5 6 7 8

The tracker will wait for stability of the SMR before taking a measurement. Once the target is stable the tracker will measure the point automatically. When completed at this location, FARO CompIT will prompt to move the SMR to a second location. Once it has taken the second point the results of the ADM test are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided. If the results read FAIL, click the CANCEL button and repeat the test.

NOTE: If the PASS criteria are not met after repeating the test contact FARO for further instructions.

Operational Checks
General Page To access the operational checks: 1 2

From the DEVICES menu, select LASER TRACKER > OPERATIONAL CHECK. The OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialogue box will appear.

FIGURE 6-6 Operational Checks

Select the GENERAL PAGE tab (it should be displayed by default). 38

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4 5 6


Place the SMR at the home position. Click the HOME button. Check that the SMR Return Power is GREEN.

NOTE: The Return Power is a percentage of laser power currently being received by the tracker from the SMR compared to the maximum power, which is established at the factory. Typically a dirty SMR or Tracker lens is the cause of a low Return Power signal. The Target Return Intensity will be displayed in red if the return power becomes to low. 7

Check the temperature, pressure, and humidity of the trackers measuring environment. Temperature = 4C (40F) to 43C (110F). Humidity = 0% to 95% (non-condensing).

NOTE: A lightning bolt next to a reading indicates that the measurement originates from the trackers internal sensors, while a pencil indicates that the measurement was manually configured. Repeatability Checks Repeatability checks are performed to test the interferometer and encoders consistency during measurement. Closure (Interferometer Repeatability) The Closure check ensures that the interferometer is counting the distance properly as the SMR is tracked throughout the measurement volume. The mounting of the tracker, stability of the target and environment will effect repeatability of the measurements. 1

From the OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialog, select the REPEATIBILITY tab.

39
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialog, click on the CLOSURE button in the TESTS section.

FIGURE 6-7 Operational Checks - Repeatability

NOTE: The Position Monitor section displays the real time position of the target in spherical coordinates: Azimuth angle (Az), Zenith angle (Ze), and Radial distance (D). dT value displays the last measurement result. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Place the SMR at the home position. Click the HOME button. Click the START TEST button. Remove the SMR from the TMR and track it around the measurement volume. Return the SMR to the TMR. Click the MEASURE button to record the repeatability. Check that the TOTAL value in the TEST RESULTS section is in the following range (scroll to view the Total column, or maximize the Operational Checks window). Total = -0.025 mm to 0.025 mm (-0.001 in to 0.001 in)

10 11

Repeat steps 5 and 6 two (2) more times making sure that the above criteria are maintained. Click the STOP TEST button when completed.

NOTE: If the criteria in Step 10 are not met, repeat the CLOSURE test. If the result is the same contact FARO for further instructions. OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialogue box will appear.

Static Repeatability
The static repeatability check determines whether the tracker can repeat the measured position of a point. 40
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1 2 3 4


Place the SMR in the TMR. Click the HOME button to reset the distance. Position an SMR Nest approximately 3 meters from the tracker. The calibration tripod supplied with the tracker may be used Remove the SMR from the TMR and track to the reference point.

NOTE: The SMR remains at the reference point and is not moved at all during the test. 5

Click the STATIC button in the TESTS section.

FIGURE 6-8 Static Repeatability Test

6 7

Click the START TEST button. Enter the desired time delay between observations. The default value of two seconds is recommended.

FIGURE 6-9 Time Delay

Click the OK button.

The tracker will begin by measuring a reference point, and then it will measure successive points to test repeatability. 9 10 11

Allow the tracker to collect 10 measurements. Watch the Measurement Indicator light on the tracker blink 10 times. Click the STOP TEST button. Check that the TOTAL value in the TEST RESULTS section is in the following range (scroll to view the Total column, or maximize the Operational Checks window). Total = -0.025 mm to 0.025 mm (-0.001 in to 0.001 in) 41
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

Repeat this test at two other locations.

NOTE: If the criteria in Step 10 is not met for the first location, track the SMR back to the TMR and check the stability of the tracker, stand, and tripod/reference nest being used and repeat the test from the beginning. If the criteria are not met, contact FARO for further instructions.

Dynamic Repeatability
This check determines whether the tracker can repeat the measured position of a point after moving the SMR throughout the measurement envelope. It is similar to the Static test except that the SMR will be moved between measurements. 1 2 3

Place the SMR in the TMR. Click the HOME button to reset the distance. Click on the Dynamic button in the Tests section.

FIGURE 6-10 Dynamic Repeatability Test

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Position an SMR Nest on a stable surface or on the object being measured. The calibration tripod supplied with the tracker may be used Remove the SMR from the TMR and track to the reference point. Click the DYNAMIC button. Click the START TEST button. After the tracker has measured a reference point, track the SMR around the measurement envelope. Return the SMR to the Reference nest. Click the MEASURE button. Click the STOP TEST button to review the results.

42
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

Check that the TOTAL value in the TEST RESULTS section is in the following range (scroll to view the Total column, or maximize the Operational Checks window). Total = -0.025 mm to 0.025 mm (-0.001 in to 0.001 in)

13

Repeat this test at two other locations.

NOTE: If the criteria in Step 12 is not met for the first location, track the SMR back to the TMR and check the stability of the tracker, stand, and tripod/reference nest. Repeat the Dynamic Repeatability test. If the criteria are not met, contact FARO for further instructions. 14

Click the SAVE AS button to save test results.

File name = Training Repeatibillity.csv. Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 6-11 Save As dialog

15

Click the CLOSE button to exit Operational Checks.

After the above checks have passed the tracker will be ready for use.

43
Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 7: Feature Measurement


OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate proper measurement and compensation techniques. After completion of this section the student will learn to measure geometric features properly. They will also be able to differentiate the differences between measured, constructed and nominal features.

Types of Features
There are two basic types of features in CAM2 Measure X, require a plane of projection, and do not.

45
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

2D Features
A 2D feature requires a plane of projection. When selecting a 2D feature from the measurement menu, the dialog box will appear. You will always need to select the plane to which the points will be projected. A good way to tell if a feature is 2D is the appearance of the dialog box.

FIGURE 7-1 Select Plane

2 1

3 5
1. Rectangular Slot 3. Round Slot 5. 2D Line
FIGURE 7-2 2D Features

4
2. Circles 4. Ellipse

46
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

3D Features
A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection. 3D features also have some depth, and are displayed as within CAM2 Measure X.

2 3 1

1. Cone 3. Cylinders

2. Sphere

FIGURE 7-3 3D Features

47
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compensation
After the FaroArmLaser Tracker has been compensated you are ready to start measuring. When measuring with a SMR, a point is taken in the center of the SMR each time the INSERT key is pressed. The point actually needs to be projected the radius of the SMR in order for the measurement to be taken in the correct location. The distance between the point of contact and the center of the SMR is known as SMR Offset. This transfer of the point from the center of the SMR to the correct location is known as SMR compensation.

2 3
1. SMR 3. SMR Offset
FIGURE 7-4 SMR Offset

2. Center of the SMR

NOTE: The location of the SMR is extremely important when FaroArmthe HOME key is pressed.

48
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 To better explain this subject here are a few examples.

Plane Compensation

FIGURE 7-5 Plane Measurement

A plane is defined using the center of the SMR for each point taken with the INSERT key as shown below.

FIGURE 7-6 Pre-Plane

49
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 This plane can then be compensated in one of two directions. The correct compensation depends on where the HOME key is pressed. In this situation the HOME key is to be pressed above the plane. The plane will then be compensated down the distance equal to the SMR radius.

FIGURE 7-7 SMR Compensation

50
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compensation of a 2D Feature
When measuring a 2D feature the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears. Each point of the 2D feature is automatically projected to that selected plane. Compensation for the SMR diameter will be performed when measuring 2D features. When measuring a hole, the hole will be measured as a circle projected to a selected plane. The compensation point is taken by pressing the HOME key inside the hole for an inner diameter, outside the post for an outer diameter. This inner diameter concept is demonstrated below. Measure at least three points inside the hole.

FIGURE 7-8 Circle Measurement

Each time the INSERT key is pressed that point is automatically projected to the selected plane.

FIGURE 7-9 Plane Projection

51
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 A circle is defined.

FIGURE 7-10 Pre-Compensated Circle

By compensating in the center of the hole the circle is offset the distance equal to the radius of the SMR. This results in the correct diameter.

FIGURE 7-11 Circle Compensation

52
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Review Features
Review Features allows the operator to see every feature that has been measured or constructed in a particular measurement session. All data is displayed in the current alignment.

Printing
From Review Features a graphical text report can be printed to a printer, saved to a file, or e-mailed.

Erasing
Delete extra or un-needed features with the DELETE ERASE button in the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box. icon, or with the

Important Topics - Feature Measurement


A 2D feature requires a plane of projection. A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection. The INSERT key is used to take measured points. The HOME key is used to compensate for the radius of the SMR.

53
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical


Practical Exercises
Execute Mode
EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run pre-programmed measurement routines. To help get accustomed to the FaroArm, measure several of the preprogrammed measurements. 1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < EXECUTE ONLY. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln). Click OK.
FIGURE 8-1 Choose File type

From the LIST window, select 10REF089_XLN Basic Measurements.

FIGURE 8-2 Select the Basic Measurements Program

Click the EXECUTE button.

55
Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6 7


Wait a few seconds while the CAD file loads. Read each COMMENT box.

FIGURE 8-3 Comment box

8 9 10

Click the OK button to clear the comments box. Follow the glowing targets to measure the points using the INSERT key on the keyboard. Once all the points for a feature are measured, a trickle down tone will be played by the computer. Press FaroArmthe HOME key on the keyboard.

REMEMBER: The location of where theHOME key is pressed determines the direction of the SMR compensation. 11

Measure all the features in the program in the same manner.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels The measurement routine is automatically performing alignments, constructions, and dimensions. These commands will be discussed in detail in the following chapters. 12

After the last measurement, the program will prompt the operator to measure another part, press YES.

FIGURE 8-4 Repeat the Program?

56
Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

View Control
Run the program again. Try the following view commands: Hot Keys - Viewing Keys Command

Zooms In i Zooms Out o Reset the View, or Zoom All e Pan WUXV Device View a Top View ^ Side View % Front View $ Isometric View ) Center View C+t S+A+E Full Screen Increase Whisker Scale S++ Decrease Whisker Scale -

57
Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Hot Keys - Viewing (on numeric keypad) Keys Command Zooms In Zooms Out Pan Rotate around X Counterclockwise Rotate around X Clockwise Rotate around Y Counterclockwise Rotate around Y Clockwise Rotate around Z Counterclockwise Rotate around Z Clockwise

+ 8462 7 9 1 3 0 .

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a key which switches a section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size keyboard. At the end of the program, when prompted to measure another part, press theHOME key for NO. The graphics screen now contains all of the features that have just been measured and all of the nominal features from the program.

58
Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Review Features
To view the measurement data, use the Review Features command. 1

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

FIGURE 8-5 Review Features

Take a look at the features by selecting them in the FEATURE LIST.

NOTE: Measurements have the M_ prefix. Constructions have the C_ prefix. Nominals have the N_ prefix.

59
Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements


OBJECTIVE: The instructor will introduce coordinate systems and alignments. After completion of this section, the student will understand the concepts of plane (3), line (2), and point (1) reducibility. The student will gain an understanding of how and why coordinate systems are used.

Coordinate Systems
What is a Coordinate System?
Coordinate systems are XYZ reference frames built from measured features. Start by measuring the features that will be used to construct a coordinate features. system. These are sometimes called CAM2 Measure X offers many ways to establish coordinate systems, in this section two of the most common coordinate systems: the 3-2-1 and the LineLine will be presented. CAM2 Measure X also allows the operator to set up different coordinate systems and switch between them. New coordinate systems can be created from existing coordinate systems.

61
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Two coordinate systems that are used in this class: 1 The XYZ coordinate system of the measurement device and of the nominal features are known as the World Coordinate System or WCS (1).

2 The XYZ coordinates that are constructed from a coordinate system on the part are known as the Users Coordinate System or UCS (2).

1 2

FIGURE 9-1 Coordinate System

Alignments
What is an Alignment?
The term alignment comes from the traditional Measuring Machine), to indicate that the part needs to be coordinate system of the machine. (Coordinate to the

In CAM2 Measure X, the coordinate system of the measured features is aligned with the coordinate system of nominal features. This allows you to compare the measured part to the design data. The process is also known as CAD to Part alignment. An alignment should be as soon as possible.

62
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Feature Reducibility
Feature Reducibility is a term used to describe that one type of feature can be used like another type for alignments, constructions and dimensions. , that means For example, a circle is it can be used like a point for alignments, constructions, or dimmensions.

FIGURE 9-2 Point Reducability

A Circle is also Line reducible and Plane reducible.

FIGURE 9-3 Line and Plane Reducability

63
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Feature Reducibility Exercise


Complete the following feature reducibility table: Plane Arc Line Point

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

Ellipse

Line

Plane

Point

64
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Plane Rectangular Slot

Line

Point

Round Slot

Sphere

65
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Constructions
What is a Construction?
A construction allows you to create features that cannot be measured directly. Sometimes points or other features are specified on a drawing but do not actually exist on the part. For example, the intersection of two lines where the corner has a fillet or radius.

Common Constructions
The following is a list of some of the more common constructions used in basic measurement: 1 Point: Line/Line: Intersection of two lines. Line/Feature: Intersection of line and another feature. (Such as plane or sphere)

FIGURE 9-4 Intersection Point

66
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 Circle: Best-fit: Bolt circle diameters.

FIGURE 9-5 Bolt Hole Circle

3 Plane: Parallel: Constructs a plane at a known distance from another plane. Bisector: Constructs a plane between two planes.

There are many constructions available. Review the constructions to evaluate which commands can be applied to a measurement task.

67
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dimensions
What is a Dimension?
A dimension describes the relationship between two or more features. There are several types of dimensions available in CAM2 Measure X: 1 Length: Displays the 3D distance between two features as well as the change in X, Y and Z.

FIGURE 9-6 Point to Point distance

FIGURE 9-7 Point to Line distance

68
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 9-8 Point to Plane distance

69
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 Angle: Displays the angle between two (or three) features.

FIGURE 9-9 Angle Line to Line

3 Orientation: These are geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T) features that display a length result. CAM2 Measure X has a separate pull-down menu for a variety of GD&T dimensions.

70
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Tricky Dimensions
Most CAM2 Measure X dimensions are fairly straight forward, but there are few that are confusing: Dimension > Length > Line to Line, or Dimension > Length > Plane to Plane: This gives the minimum distance between two features. The length is measured from the center point of one feature to the perpendicular distance of the other feature. Selecting the features in the opposite order will generate a different result.

FIGURE 9-10 Dimension Line/Line or Plane/Plane

A measured or constructed point on one of the features and the Dimension > Length > Point to Line, or Dimension > Length > Point to Plane command provides the best solution.

71
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Basic Part Measurement


All coordinate systems behave in the same manner. Each coordinate system requires a plane, a line, and a point. Feature reducibility is a term used to describe a feature for coordinate systems, constructions, and dimensions. A best fit circle is constructed using at least three point reducible features.

72
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical


Practical Exercise
Using the base plate of the demo part, complete a typical measurement session. In the first exercise, the EXECUTE command was used. This exercise will allow you to be more independent and select the commands from the pulldown menu bar Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be the base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin respectively.

E 1
P3

8 9 7 10

2 3 4 5 G

P4

F A
P1

P2

FIGURE 10-1 FARO Demonstration Part

Setting the Alignment


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. As default, CAM2 Measure X automatically loads millimeters as the units, 1.27 as the tolerances, and a DRO display of 4 numbers after the decimal. It is very likely that your part will not use these values. However, CAM2 Measure X has the ability to modify, save and load part preferences. 73
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1 2


From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-2 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 10-3 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to 0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to CAM2 Measure. 6

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 10-4 Probes

74
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7 8


From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-5 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the plane. The NORMAL IJK values describe the direction of the plane. RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.

STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit. MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the plane.
FIGURE 10-6 Plane Results

NOTE: The number of digits for the label (001) is determined by the Application Preference, Miscellaneous, Number of Digits for Label. The default value is three. NOTE: The decimal place values are determined by the Part Preference, Display Decimal Places. The default value is four places to the left, three to the right. 75
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

After accepting a plane, press the HOME key or the ESC key to cancel the plane measurement command.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure always continues to measure additional features until receiving a command to stop. Stop, or Cancel, the command by pressing the HOME key or by pressing the ESC key. 11

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 10-7 Probes

12 13

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-8 Select Plane

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an onscreen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

76
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 14

Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B. Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-9 Measure X Axis

15

Take a look at the results.

The POINT XYZ values describe the first point on the line. The AXIS IJK values describe the direction of the line. RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.

STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit. MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.
FIGURE 10-10 Line Results

77
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 16

Continue with the Measure 2D Line command.

Measure the line nearest Slot F. Measure in the direction from Sphere A towards Sphere C.

FIGURE 10-11 Measure Y Intercept

NOTE: The Part Preference for Auto Plane Selection is set to LAST (default). This will place all 2D features on the last plane selected in the SELECT PLANE dialog. 17

Take a look at the results.

If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 10-12 Line Results

78
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 18

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001 Select a Line = M_LINE002. Select CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-13 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

NOTE: The Z Rotation IJK is the vector of the previous Z Axis relative to the new Z Axis. The Translation XYZ values shows where the coordinate system has moved. The Z Angle Rotation is the angle between the previous Z Axis and the new Z Axis. RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit. STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit. MAX AND MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN. 19 20

Click OK to accept the coordinate system results. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART (This step will be discussed in the next chapter).

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-14 CAD=Part Alignment
S

79
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 21

Click OK to accept the alignment results.

FIGURE 10-15 Base Plate Alignment

Feature Measurements
Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1. See FARO Demonstration Part on page 73. 1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-16 Select Plane

80
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 10-17 Measure Circle 1

NOTE: In the RESULTS dialog box, the View Style changes from Simple to Tabular. After any alignment command, the View Style automatically changes to the Tabular style. 4

Take a look at the results.

The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the circle. The DIAMETER value describes the Diameter of the circle. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the circle.
FIGURE 10-18 Circle Results

81
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure circles until the command is canceled.

Continue measuring all eight circles in the pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 10-19 Measure Circles 2 through 8

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an onscreen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels.

FIGURE 10-20 Measured Circles 1 through 8

82
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Constructions
Determine the diameter of the bolt circle pattern of the eight holes. 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < BEST FIT. Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001 through M_CIRCLE008. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Select CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-21 Construct Circle Best Fit

Take a look a the results.

Label = BOLT_CIRCLE. This is the new name for this feature. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-22 Changing a Feature Label

NOTE: Was the circle accepted before changing the label? You can change the feature label later using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

83
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Changing Labels from Review Features


NOTE: If the feature label was not changed in the RESULTS dialog, use the following steps to correct the feature label. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Double left mouse click on the bolt circle from the list of features. Select a Feature = C_CIRCLE001.

NOTE: The first object created in the file will be at the bottom of the list, the most recent feature at the top of the list. 3

Change the label. Type BOLT_CIRCLE. Select a Feature = BOLT_CIRCLE.

FIGURE 10-23 Review Features

Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

84
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dimensions
To establish some dimensions measure a couple more features. 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 10-24 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE. Measure Sphere A.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-25 Measure Sphere A

85
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the circle. The DIAMETER value describes the Diameter of the circle. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.
FIGURE 10-26 Sphere Results

CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure spheres until the command is canceled. Continue measuring Sphere D.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-27 Measure Sphere D

86
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Take a look at the results.

If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.
FIGURE 10-28 Sphere Results

From the DIMENSION menu, select LENGTH < POINT/POINT.

Select 1st Point = M_SPHERE001. Select 2nd Point = M_SPHERE002. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-29 Dimension Length Point/Point

NOTE: Choose features from the drop-down list box, or use the FROM SCREEN button to pick it from the screen. In CAM2 Measure X dialog boxes, all feature drop-down list boxes have a FROM SCREEN button so you can choose the feature from the CAD screen instead of the list box. 8

Take a look at the results.

The DELTA XYZ values describe the distance between the two center points along each axis. The LENGTH value describes the straight distance between the two center points. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 10-30 Dimension Results

87
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE < APEX.

Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I. Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I. Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-31 Dimension Angle Apex

10

Take a look at the results.

The ANGLE value is the angle between the three points. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 10-32 Angle Results

88
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


View the results of the features using the REVIEW FEATURES command. 1

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

FIGURE 10-33 Review Features

2 3

Click the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators name = your name. Name of the part = Basic Measurements. Serial number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-34 Enter Header Information

89
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Simple. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-35 Report List

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

FIGURE 10-36 Report Preview

Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

File name = Basic Measurement. Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 10-37 Save As

90
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7 8


Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save The Measurements


1 2

From the FILE menu, select SAVE. The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

File name = Basic Measurement. Save as type = CAM2 Measure Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 10-38 Save As

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X saves files in the CAM2 Measure Document (*.fce) format.

Additional Coordinate Systems


If for some reason the alignment is not correct, or a different coordinate system is required, CAM2 Measure X is able to set up additional coordinate systems. For this exercise use the top surface of the plate, two spheres to define a line, and the center point of the bolt circle. 1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE. Measure Sphere B.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-39 Measure Sphere B

91
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Take a look at the results.

If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 10-40 Sphere Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

NOTE: Notice that the base plane can define something other than +XY, and the line can define something other than +X in the 3-2-1 coordinate system. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Direction of Plane = +YZ. Select the radio button next to FIRST POINT ON AXIS. First Point on Axis = M_SPHERE001. Second Point on Axis = M_SPHERE003. Direction of Axis = +Y. Select Origin = C_BOLT_CIRCLE. Select CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 10-41 3-2-1 Coordinate System

NOTE: This creates a new coordinate system to view the data. The X axis is perpendicular to M_PLANE001. The Y axis is parallel to a line between M_SPHERE001 and M_SPHERE003. The origin is located at the center of the bolt circle, C_BOLT_CIRCLE. 5

Click OK to accept the results.

92
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Switching between coordinate systems.


The blue coordinate system icon shows the active coordinate system. The green coordinate system icon shows the non-active coordinate systems. There are two ways to change the active coordinate system. 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SET ACTIVE. Set Active = C_COORDSYS001. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-42 Set Active Coordinate System

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the corner of the plate. 2

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

Current Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002. Click OK.

FIGURE 10-43 Set Active Coordinate System from Review Features

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the center of the bolt circle.

Save Again
1

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

93
Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 11: Checking a Part


Objective: The instructor will introduce nominals and how to compare measured objects to them. The students will be able to measure a feature and have CAM2 Measure X determine if the dimension is out of tolerance.

Nominals
What is a Nominal?
A nominal is the true value of a feature. The measured value of a part should be equal to or as close to the nominal value as possible. Compare to nominals to see if a part is good or bad, (or to update the print to match the part).

Types of Nominals
The engineering or design department will provide a 3D CAD (Computer Aided Design) file or a print that contains the nominal information for the part. CAM2 Measure X has several methods to enter nominals into the file for comparison to the measurements. 1 Enter Values: Circles, Cones, Cylinders, Ellipses, Lines, Planes, Points, Slots, and Spheres are created by typing the known value. This is typically used when working with a paper drawing or hard copy, rather than an electronic copy of the CAD file.

2 From CAD: Translate, and add CAD models through IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5, Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS formats. Then select the feature from the screen to add it to the CAM2 Measure X database as a nominal. 3 Construct Nominal: Sometimes, when working with CAD data, holes and other features are not displayed as separate entities, but rather they only exist as edges of surfaces or solids. CAM2 Measure X can construct a nominals by selecting points along the trimmed edge of a surface.

95
Chapter 11: Checking a Part

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

CAD to Part Alignments


Nominals are considered CAD and measurements are considered the Part. To compare measured data to nominals, a CAD to Part type alignment must be completed. This course will focus on the two commands; CAD=PART and ITERATIVE. NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not compare the XYZ information of a measured feature to a nominal feature without an alignment.

CAD=Part
This command requires that some type of constructed coordinate system on the part using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current coordinate system equal to the CAD (or Nominal) coordinate system. This will overlay the measurements onto the CAD (or Nominal) data. To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the coordinate system on the CAD (or Nominal) data. In many cases the origin of the coordinate system will not be on the part. A rotation or a translation must be performed to get the coordinate system on the part to match the CAD (or Nominal) data. The SCALE option allows the operator to adjust the measurement scale of the part, and adjust for temperature changes in the environment.

Important Topics - Checking a Part


CAD (or Nominal) data are the design values for the part. Create Nominal data in three different ways: From CAD, Enter Values, and Construct Nominals. A CAD to Part alignment must be successfully completed in order to compare measurements to nominals.

96
Chapter 11: Checking a Part

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical


Practical Exercise
Use a drawing for nominal information. Measure alignment features, construct a coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Getting the Nominals


In this exercise check the demo part base using the reference drawing.
5 4 3 2 1

65 [2.56]
D

20 [.787] 167 [6.575]

.50

.50 B
130 [5.118]

B
50 [1.969] 15 [.591] 25 [.984] 25 [.984] 15 [.591] 30 50 [1.181] 65 [1.969] [2.559] 160 [6.299] 4X 170 [6.693] 50 [1.969] .50 C 5 [.197] 20 [.787] 15 [.591]

50 [1.969] 65 [2.559] 15 [.591]

20 [.787]

20 [.787]

265 [10.433]

B
240 [9.449] 300 [11.811]

255 [10.04]

150 [5.906]

C
60 [2.362] 30 [1.181] 15
A

100 50 [3.94] .50 A [1.969]

40 [1.575] 15 15 [.591] [.591] EQ. SP. ON A +0.25 20 [0.798] -0.10 140 [5.512] BC
1.0 M A B C

15 [.591] 30 [1.181]

8X

.50

25 [.984]

SECTION B-B
03FRM049-REV 1

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. 4 3

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.01 1
THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

63 FINSH REQUIRED

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

Armed with Quality

TITLE

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE


2 1

FIGURE 12-1 FARO Demonstration Part

Datum features are specified in the print. The top surface is Datum A, the left edge is Datum B and the center circle is Datum C. Since the print does not show an X, Y, Z coordinate system, Datum A will be the XY plane, Datum B 97
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 will be the X axis and Datum C will be the origin of the coordinate system (This may vary depending on the part).

Setting the Alignment


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 12-2 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 12-3 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

98
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 12-4 Probes

7 8

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure Datum A as a plane. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 12-5 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_A. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-6 Plane Results

99
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 12-7 Probes

11 12

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 12-8 Select Plane

13

Measure Datum B as a line. Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 12-9 Measure X Axis

100
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 14

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_B. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-10 Line Results

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels 15 16

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 12-11 Select Plane

17

Measure Datum C as a circle.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation.
FIGURE 12-12 Measure Circle 9

101
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 18

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_C. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-13 Circle Results

19

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = M_DATUM_C. Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 12-14 3-2-1 Coordinate System

20 21

Click OK to accept the results. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = NONE. Click OK.
FIGURE 12-15 CAD=Part Alignment

22

Click OK to accept the results. 102

Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 This saves the position of the part as an alignment. Begin checking the features on the part. Remember to perform the CAD to Part type alignment to see the measured compared to the nominal values.

FIGURE 12-16 Datum Alignment

Save The Measurements


1 2

From the FILE menu, select SAVE. The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

File name = Checking a Part. Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 12-17 Save As

103
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measuring Features and Adding Nominals


After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the XYZ and diameter values can be extracted from the print: X Circle 1 Circle 3 Circle 5 Circle 7 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm -70.00 mm Y 70.00 mm 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm Z 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm Diameter 20.00 mm 20.00 mm 20.00 mm 20.00 mm

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part base. 1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 12-18 Select Plane

Measure Circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation. Label = CIRCLE001_I.
FIGURE 12-19 Measure Circle 1

104
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 12-20 Results Nominal Tab

Enter the nominal information.

X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 12-21 Construct Circle Enter Values

105
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Z = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = unchecked. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 12-22 Results Tolerance Tab

7 8

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the tolerance information for the next circle Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured and the nominal.

FIGURE 12-23 Tabular Results

Click OK to accept the circle.

106
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation. Label = CIRCLE003_I.
FIGURE 12-24 Measure Circle 3

11

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 12-25 Results Nominal Tab

12

Enter the nominal information.

X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 12-26 Construct Circle Enter Values

107
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13 14


Click OK to accept the circle. Measure Circle 5.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation. Label = CIRCLE005_I.
FIGURE 12-27 Measure Circle 5

15 16

Click OK to accept the results. The nominal will be created in Review Features. Measure Circle 7.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation. Label = CIRCLE007_I.
FIGURE 12-28 Measure Circle 7

17

Click OK to accept the RESULTS. The nominal will be created in Review Features.

108
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Adding a Nominal through Review Features


1 2 3 4 5

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Select M_CIRCLE005_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list. Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click the KEY IN button .

Enter the nominal information.

X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 12-29 Construct Circle Enter Values

6 7 8

Select M_CIRCEL007_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list. Click the KEY IN button .

Enter the nominal information.

X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 12-30 Construct Circle Enter Values

109
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 2

Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name = Your Name. Name of the Part = Checking a Part. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 12-31 Enter Header Information

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features that are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 12-32 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular. 4

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

110
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Checking a Part. Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 12-33 Save Report

6 7

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again
1

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

111
Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 13: Move Device Position


OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to move the measurement device to increase the working volume. After completing this section, the student will be able to move the measurement device, allowing them to measure large parts in a single file.

Purpose
The Move Device Position command has two functions: It moves the device to a new location within the coordinate system. It realigns the device to the part if the relationship has .

Moving the Device


This is the original intent for the Move Device Position command. It allows you measure a part on which the device can not measure the features from one location. Measure or more point-reducible features, run the Move Device Position command, move the device, and remeasure the features. NOTE: Comp Axis points can not be used in the Move Device Position command. The compensation direction is based upon the active alignment. When the device moves, the active alignment is not valid. There is a penalty. Every time the device is moved the device may incur error. To minimize the error, the features should be as far apart as possible while still allowing the device to move to the new location. To maintain very accurate measurements avoid using the Move Device Position command by placing the device in an ideal location.

113
Chapter 13: Move Device Position

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Realign the Part to the Device


If the setup gets , use the Move Device Position command to reestablish the alignment between the part and the device. There or more point-reducible features in the file. They should be as far must be apart as possible to minimize error. NOTE: Periodic realignment is recommended when measuring large parts over an extended period of time. This is to compensate for variations caused by temperature changes or vibrations.

Important Topics - Move Device Position


The Move Device Position command may be used to move the device to a new location or to realign the device to the part if the part has moved. After using the Move Device Position command, a loss of accuracy may occur.

114
Chapter 13: Move Device Position

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical


Practical Exercise
In this exercise align to a CAD file, relocate the Device relative to the part, and realign using the Move Device Position command.

E 1
P3

8 9 7 10

2 3 4 5 G

P4

F A
P1

P2

FIGURE 14-1 FARO Demonstration Part

Importing CAD File


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 14-2 Drawing Units

115
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3 4


From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 14-3 Load Tolerances

5 6

Click OK. From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 14-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

116
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 14-5 Adding CAD Parts

If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 14-6 FARO_Demo_Part2 CAD file

Setting the Coordinate System


Another feature of CAM2 Measure X is the ability to create a new coordinate system by translating or rotating an existing coordinate system. This feature is helpful when you cannot construct a coordinate system from measured features on your part to correspond with the location of the coordinate system of the CAD model. In this exercise, in addition to learning the Move Device Position command, we will also practice translating a coordinate system. The steps below will guide you through the process.

117
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-7 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 14-8 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-9 Plane Results

118
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-10 Probes

6 7

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 14-11 Select Plane

Measure Circle 9.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 14-12 Measure Circle 9

119
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE009_I. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-13 Circle 9 Results

10 11

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 14-14 Select Plane

12

Measure a 2D line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 14-15 Measure X Axis

120
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-16 Line Results

14

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.


.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009_I. Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 14-17 3-2-1 Coordinate System

15

Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

121
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 16

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION. Use the following values:

Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001. X Offset = -150.0. Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001. Y Offset = -65.0. Select Z Origin = C_COORDSYS001. Z Offset = 0.0. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 14-18 Translate Coordinate System

17 18

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 14-19 CAD=Part Alignment

122
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 19

Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-20 CAD to Part Alignment

Save The Measurements


20

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

The SAVE AS dialog box appears. File name = Move Device Position. Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.
FIGURE 14-21 Save As

123
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measure Features for the Move Device Position


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-22 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select POINTS > COMP OFF. Measure Point 1.

Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-23 Measure Point 1

124
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT001. Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-24 Point 1 Results

Measure Point 2.

Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-25 Measure Point 2

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT002. Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-26 Point 2 Results

125
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Measure Point 3.

Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-27 Measure Point 3

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT003. Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-28 Point 3 Results

Measure Point 4.

Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-29 Measure Point 4

126
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT004. Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-30 Point 4 Results

Performing the Move Device Position Command


1

From the DEVICES menu, select MOVE DEVICE POSITION. Selected Choices = M_POINT001, M_POINT002, M_POINT003, M_POINT004. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 14-31 Move Device Position

NOTE: Using 2D features (Arc, Circle, Slot) CAM2 Measure X requires you to measure a plane for each feature. 2 3

Move the Measurment Device (Move the device, or move the part). Click OK in the MOVE THE DEVICE dialog.

127
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Measure Point 1. Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.
FIGURE 14-32 Measure Point 1

5 6

Click OK to accept the point. Measure Point 2. Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-33 Measure Point 2

7 8

Click OK to accept the point. Measure Point 3.

Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-34 Measure Point 3

128
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9 10


Click OK to accept the point. Measure Point 4.

Take a point by pressing the INSERT key. Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-35 Measure Point 4

11

Click OK to accept the point. The results of the Device Move are displayed.

FIGURE 14-36 Device Position Results

12

Click OK to accept the new Device Position.

129
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Add Measurements to an Existing Feature


If you have a large feature that can not be totally measured from one location, CAM2 Measure X allows you to add points to the feature. This will update the feature location and all associated constructions, coordinate systems, and dimensions used with this feature. 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-37 Probes

2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Select M_CIRCLE009_I.

FIGURE 14-38 Review Features

130
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Click the EDIT button.

Select the ADD READINGS radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 14-39 Add Readings

Measure Circle 9.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 14-40 Measure Circle 9

The points, or Readings, are now added to the feature and M_CIRCLE009_I is recalculated. 6

Click on the READINGS tab.

FIGURE 14-41 Circle 9 Readings

NOTE: The measured circle has points, or Readings, from both device positions. 7

Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

131
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Save Again 1

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

132
Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks


The Measurement Track
There are numerous ways to approach the same task, and some ways are easier than others. This section presents the Measurement Track, a good rule of thumb procedure to help guide you through the measurement tasks.

Examine the Task


Before you start taking measurements, determine why the part is being inspected and what results are expected. Measuring without direction will yield voluminous data that will make it difficult to find the answers to the original question. Knowing the goal in advance will save a great deal of time.

Setup Considerations
Before beginning to measure a part, ensure that the device can reach all the features to be measured. This can eliminate device movements due to the inability to reach features.

Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment


The coordinate system and alignment created will depend on the purpose for measuring the part and the amount of data available. The two most commonly used alignment options are (1) a CAD=Part type alignment to a constructed coordinate system, and (2) an Iterative alignment. Following are some examples of when one method may be preferred to another. 1 Coordinate System / CAD = Part. The part requires a specific set of datums be followed. The objective is to trouble-shoot the part.

2 Iterative. For use if there is no clear datum scheme. The datum scheme allows for a best fit. If a Coordinate System/CAD=Part approach shows the part to be slightly out of specification. In such a case, it is possible a best fit alignment will show the part to be within specification.

133
Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Always set the alignment as soon as possible during a measurement session. Many commands depend upon the alignment to operate correctly. Save the file as soon as the alignment is complete. If anything goes wrong, reopen the file with the saved alignment. Continue to save frequently.

Data Collection
Although it is probably more efficient to perform the measurements, constructions, and dimensions first, then add nominals at a later time, it is not very practical. With large parts, it is best to break up the work session into smaller sections. Within each section, perform the measurements within that area and assign their nominals. Follow with the constructions and dimensions, and add their nominals. When each section is done, save the file then move onto the next section. This process will help prevent confusion with lists of features. All the data in the database will be grouped in the area in which the measurements were taken.

Data Output
Know what sort of output data is expected from the part, IGES data, graphical report, text report, etc. Remember that printed reports will always be printed in the current coordinate system. If there are multiple coordinate systems, make sure the correct coordinate system is set active before printing. When exporting CAD data, always complete the CAD = PART alignment command. The data will always be exported in the World Coordinate System. A file without a CAD to Part type alignment will not produce the expected results when the data is imported into another system.

Other Hints
Holes: If features are not on the same plane, modify the AUTO PLANE SELECT preference and choose define. The MEASURE < CIRCLE command will prompt you to measure a plane before each circle. This preferences sets all other 2D commands to work in the same manner. Surfaces: Choose Select Nominal Surfaces Only in the Auto Nominal Association part preference. This will automatically select the nearest Nominal surface for inspection and not any previously measured features.

134
Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Clearing up the view: To clear up the graphics screen: Choose VIEW < LAYERS. Entities may be moved from one layer to another. Also, filters may be created and activated to group and sort several layers at once. To clean up the display, filter out those layers you do not wish to view. Choose VIEW < ARRANGE LABELS to automatically arrange the onscreen labels. To hide all labels, choose VIEW < PROPERTIES and click the VISUAL OBJECTS tab. Clear the MAIN LABEL VIEW check box and click APPLY. Pin or unpin the control bars. Unpin the control bars to minimize them and enlarge the graphics field. When needed, click the icon and the control bar will fly out for use. Pin the control bars to anchor them for constant view.

135
Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

Advanced Topics

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD


OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to use CAD as nominals and establish alignments. CAM2 SPC Graph will be used to create a graphical report. After completing this section, the student will learn how to use CAD as nominals and generate graphical reports.

Why Work with CAD?


CAM2 Measure X makes it easy to use CAD as nominals for measurement.

CAD Terminology
Types of CAD Data
Wireframe: These entities define the outline of a part. They can include points, circles, arcs, lines, polylines, and splines. A polyline is a bunch of line segments stitched together to approximate a curve. A spline is simple curve. Surface: A surface is used to define the outer boundary of a part. Surfaces are typically used to define the geometry of complex curved parts, such as automotive and aerospace sheet metal parts. Surfaces are very popular for creating cutting paths for CNC cutting tools. Solid: A solid model is also used to define the outer boundary of a part, but solids have a thickness or mass. Solid modeling is popular for the design of a variety of parts. Many CAD systems start with a solid model then create the 2D drawings and 3D surfaces from the solid.

139
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Standard CAD Data File Formats


The following CAD data file formats are included with CAM2 Measure X. Translators for other CAD data file formats are available and must be purchased from FARO. IGES IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Standard) was created to standardize data transfer between different CAD systems. IGES works very well for surface and wireframe entities, but not for text and dimensions. 3DM 3DM is the native file format for Rhinoceros software (Rhino 3D). Rhino can create, edit, analyze, and translate NURBS curves, surfaces, and solids. Supported formats include DWG/DXF, SAT (ACIS), X_T (Parasolid), STEP, VDA and IGES among others. VDA VDA is similar to IGES in that it is a standard used to translate data between different CAD systems. VDA is particularly prevalent in Europe.

140
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measurement Template
The Measurement Template command provides a quick method to create nominals, assign nominals, and guide you in the measurement of the part. You can run the Measurement Template command any time during the measurement process, but its primary function is to save time in the preliminary measurement and alignment tasks. NOTE: A CAD file is not required to run the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE command.

Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)


The ITERATIVE alignment command allows the use of several pointreducible features to best-fit them to their corresponding nominal values.

1 7

M
5

FIGURE 16-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

141
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

M
7 1 3

FIGURE 16-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

Unlike CAD=PART, ITERATIVE does not require a constructed coordinate system. CAM2 Measure X will use the coordinate system defined in the CAD model.

Automatic Nominal Association


After a CAD to Part alignment is complete, CAM2 Measure X will automatically look for the nearest nominal feature and associate it to the current measurement. Auto Nominal is an option in PREFERENCES. The default setting is ON when CAM2 Measure X is installed. NOTE: Changing the label of the measured feature in the RESULTS dialog box will change the label of any nominal that has been automatically associated.

Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD


CAD files can be translated though IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5, Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS formats. Always add CAD data before measuring. At least 3 point reducible features are required for the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT command. 142
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical


Practical Exercise
Use a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, modify the on-screen labels, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Translating an IGES File


Always translate, and add CAD data to the drawing file before doing any measurements. If the features are measured first and then the CAD data is added, the results may be poor because the CAD data and measurements may not align properly.

E 1
P3

8 9 7 10

2 3 4 5 G

P4

F A
P1

P2

FIGURE 17-1 FARO Demonstration Part

143
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-2 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 17-3 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

144
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 17-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 17-5 Adding CAD Parts

145
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 17-6 FARO_Demo_Part1 CAD file

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X can translate the IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5, Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS formats.

Measuring the Alignment Features


Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you though the measurement of the three circles. 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 17-7 Probes

146
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle. Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 17-8 Measurement Template

Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template. Click on Circle 1 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 17-9 Circle 1

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001. Click OK to accept. Circle 1 highlights red.

FIGURE 17-10 Circle 1 Results

147
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template. Click on Circle 3 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 17-11 Circle 3

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE003. Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 highlights red.

FIGURE 17-12 Circle 3 Results

Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template. Click on Circle 7 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 17-13 Circle 7

148
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE007. Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 highlights red.

FIGURE 17-14 Circle 7 Results

Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

FIGURE 17-15 Measurement Template

10

Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plan has not been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command. 11

The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-16 Select Plane

149
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle. 12

Measure circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 17-17 Measure Circle 1

NOTE: Since two features are being measured at once (plane and circle), move the SMR to the center of the hole and pull up and away from the top surface for compensation. 13 14

Take a look at the results and click OK to continue. For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-18 Select Plane

15

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 17-19 Measure Circle 3

150
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 16

For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-20 Select Plane

17

Measure Circle 7.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 17-21 Measure Circle 7

FIGURE 17-22 Measurement Results

151
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Setting an Iterative Alignment


1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007. Set Weights = unchecked. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-23 Iterative Alignment

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change. 2

Take a look at the results.

Check the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance. Notice the error between each of the measured circles and its associated nominal. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 17-24 Iterative Alignment Results

152
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Save The Measurements


1 2

From the FILE menu, select SAVE. The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

File name = Cad to Part. Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 17-25 Save As

Measure the Remaining Features


Now that the part has been aligned to the CAD data, continue to measure the remaining features on the part. Notice that when measuring features, a representation of the SMR on the screen that shows the current location of the SMR. 1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-26 Select Plane

NOTE: All of the circles on this part are in the same plane, therefore any of the circles can be selected as the plane for the next measured circle.

153
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure Circle 5.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 17-27 Measure Circle 5

Notice that there is more information in the RESULTS dialog box for each measured circle. After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X automatically searches for a nominal for each measured feature. If a nominal is found, it is automatically associated to the measured feature. You will the see the comparison between the measured and nominal features. 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE005_I. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 17-28 Circle 5 Results

Modifying On-Screen Labels


Take a look at the screen. Before running the REVIEW FEATURES command to print a report, add more information to the on-screen labels and arrange the labels in the graphics field. 1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Choose each of the measured circles. Hold down CTRL key and click the left mouse button to pick each circle. Click on the LABELS tab. 154

Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Select the Tolerance Bar, Actual, Nominal, and Deviation check boxes. Notice that the labels in the Preview window are updating.

FIGURE 17-29 Labels tabs

5 6 7

Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box. Now, arrange the labels around the part. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange the labels around the graphics filed. Use the mouse and drag, left mouse click and hold, any of the on-screen labels to another area of the graphics filed and release the mouse button to finish.

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name = Your Name. Name of the Part = CAD to Part. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-30 Enter Header Information

155
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = unchecked. NOTE: Since you manually arranged the on-screen labels, make sure that this check box is cleared. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features that are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.

FIGURE 17-31 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular. 5

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

156
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = CAD to Part. Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 17-32 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again
1

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

157
Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 18: Surface Measurement


OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to inspect a part with points. After this section, the student will be able to align a CAD model and compare any point on a part to a CAD surface. They will also be able to learn how to check a specific XYZ coordinate and compare it to the nominal.

Why Measure a Surface?


There are two major reasons to measure curved surfaces: to see if the shape of the part is correct, or to see if a component is located correctly in an assembly. Tools and fixtures may be measured to compare them to the nominal CAD surfaces of the part. This often helps to identify problems in manufacturing when trying to determine if a tool is the source of a problem or if the component is out of specification.

Surface Measurement Commands


Inspect Surface
This is the easiest way to measure a surface. After selecting the INSPECT SURFACE command, place the SMR on the part, press the INSERT key, pull back, and press the HOME key. CAM2 Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface.

Surface Edge Point


This point checks the trim edge of a part to the edge of a CAD surface. After selecting the SURFACE EDGE POINT command, place the SMR on the part, press the INSERT key, pull back and press the HOME key. CAM2 Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface edge.

Surface Point
If a CAD surface is not available and you need to measure a point on a surface, use the SURFACE POINT command. After selecting the SURFACE POINT command, measure three or more points in a small triangular pattern, then pull off the surface and press the HOME key. The points are used to determine the surface normal vector, which is then used for SMR compensation. This results in an XYZ point with an IJK vector.

159
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Home In Point
To measure a surface at a specific location, use the HOME IN command. This is one of the more complex functions within CAM2 Measure X, but it is extremely useful when checking tools, jigs, and fixtures. There is a small question of SMR compensation. CAM2 Measure X provides three different SMR compensation options. Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known). Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface. This direction is the normal vector of the surface at the XYZ point location. Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a miniplane (INSERT key) and one compensation point (HOME key).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option 2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3. Since it is very difficult to move the SMR to an exact XYZ location, the HOME IN command requires a HOME IN ZONE or diameter. The home in zone allows you to take a point within a cylindrical area around the point.

Important Topics - Surface Measurement


The two reasons to check a surface: 1 2 To see if the shape of the part is correct. To see if a component is located correctly in a assembly.

The three options for the SMR compensation vector are: 1 2 3 Key In Select Surface Sample Surface

160
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical


Practical Exercise
Use a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, check a few surfaces by measuring surface points, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

S1

S2

FIGURE 19-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

Translating and Adding the CAD data


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. 1

From the FILE menu, select NEW.

161
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 19-2 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-3 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

162
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Filename = Bracket1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 19-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Filename = Bracket1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-5 Adding CAD Parts

163
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 19-6 Bracket1 CAD file

Measuring and Creating an Alignment


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-7 Probes

164
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 3


From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 19-8 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the plane.

FIGURE 19-9 Plane Results

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 0.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 19-10 Probes

165
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6 7


From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 19-11 Select Plane

Measure the line.

Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 19-12 Measure Line 1

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 19-13 Line Results

166
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Continue with the command and measure a line.

Take the three or four points along the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 19-14 Measure Line 2

11

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE002. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 19-15 Line Results

FIGURE 19-16 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

167
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 A plane and two lines can be used to construct a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system. 12

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001. Select a Line = M_LINE002. Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 19-17 Line/Line Coordinate System

13

Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part
1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 19-18 CAD=Part Alignment

168
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Click OK to accept the alignment.

FIGURE 19-19 Aligned to CAD Model

Save the Measurements


This was a lot of work, save the file. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS. The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

File name = Surface Measurement. Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 19-20 Save As

169
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Checking a Surface
After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X will try to associate the closest nominal feature to any measurement. For Surface point measurements the default preferences are to select all surfaces both measured and nominal. Since this CAD model is complete, changing this surface option to ignore the measured surfaces will make the measuring process easier. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

Automatically Associate Nominals = checked (or On). Features: Nominal Feature Search Radius = 5.0. Display Nominal Result = unchecked (or Off).

Surfaces = Select Nominal Surfaces Only.


FIGURE 19-21 Auto Nominal Association

3 4

Click OK. From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-22 Probes

Inspect the surfaces of the CAD model.

170
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

Move the SMR close to the part; the nearest surface will turn red. Press the INSERT key to measure, pull the probe away from the surface, and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 19-23 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

Take a look at the results.

The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the distance to the surface. Click OK.

FIGURE 19-24 Inspect Surface Point Results

Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

Checking an Edge
Since we are checking an edge there will be 3 surfaces within the Auto Nominal zone (top, bottom and side). The Auto Nominal function may not select the correct surface. By turning off the Auto Nominal and selecting the surface manually the correct surface can be selected. 1

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

171
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

Automatically Associate Nominals = clear (or Off).

FIGURE 19-25 Auto Nominal Association

3 4

Click OK. From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-26 Probes

172
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE EDGE POINT.

Using the mouse, left mouse click to select the upper surface. NOTE: A drop-down menu will appear listing all the surfaces and curves near the area selected. As you scroll down the drop down list, the surface or curve will highlight red.

S1

S2

Left click to chose the appropriate surface or curve.


FIGURE 19-27 Select the Surface

Measure the point.

Place the SMR on the edge of the part near the red surface. Press the INSERT key to measure, pull the probe away from the surface, and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 19-28 Measuring a Surface Edge Point

173
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Take a look at the results.

The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the 3D deviation to the surface. Click OK.

FIGURE 19-29 Surface Edge Point Results

Measure some more surface edges.

Using Home In Points


For this example, construct a few nominal points. 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES. Use the following values: X Y 36.5 36.5 36.5 41.0 41.0 41.0 Z

Point 1 Point 2 Point 3

55.0 95.0 135.0

Enter the nominal information from the table above. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Choose the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK to create the point Click OK to accept the nominal results. Repeat the command for each point.
FIGURE 19-30 Construct Point Enter Values

174
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-31 Probes

Measure Point 1 using the Home In command and an entered (key in) vector. 3

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

Click the ADD button. Coordinate = N_POINT001. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM SCREEN button to select the point.

Approach Vector = KEY IN. Approach Vector: I=0, J=-1, K=0 Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Home-In Zone = 1.0. Click OK. Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.
FIGURE 19-32 Create Home In Point

175
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Move the probe to the part and follow the on-screen guide to the point.

Press the INSERT key, to measure when the SMR is in the zone. Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal point in the RESULTS dialog box. Click OK to accept the point.
FIGURE 19-33 Home-in Results

Measure Point 2 using the Home In command and sample the surface to determine the vector for compensation. NOTE: For this option the approach vector will be different than the compensation vector. The approach will be set along the direction of the current view. 5

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

Click the ADD button. Coordinate = N_POINT002. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM SCREEN button to select the point.

Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Home-In Zone = 1.0. Click OK. Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

FIGURE 19-34 Create Home In Point

Move the probe to the part and follow on-screen guide to an enlarged home-in zone. Measure three points by pressing the INSERT key.

176
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Use a triangular pattern just as measuring a surface point. This will determine the compensation vector. Pull back and press the HOME key to define the compensation vector direction.

Move the SMR to the part and follow the guide to the point.

Press the INSERT key, to measure when in the zone. Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal point in the RESULTS dialog box. Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 19-35 Home-in Results

Measure Point 3 using the Home In command and select the surface to determine the vector for probe compensation. 9

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

Click the ADD button. Coordinate = N_POINT003. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM SCREEN button to select the point.

Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Home-In Zone = 1.0. Click OK. Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.
FIGURE 19-36 Create Home In Point

177
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Take a look at the Output Bar. CAM2 Measure X is prompting to select a surface. Left mouse click on the top surface near the point. Select the correct Surface.

FIGURE 19-37 Select a Surface

11

Move the SMR to the part and follow on-screen guide to the point.

Press the INSERT key, to measure when in the zone. Pull back from the surface and Press the HOME key for compensation. Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal surface in the RESULTS dialog box. Click OK to accept the point.
FIGURE 19-38 Home-in Results

178
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Surface Measurement. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 19-39 Enter Header Information

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features that are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 19-40 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

179
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6


The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report. Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

File name = Surface Measurement. Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 19-41 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again
1

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

180
Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical


Practical Exercise
Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be your base plane and the edges of the plate will define the Xaxis and origin, respectively.

S1

S2

FIGURE 20-1 Faro Demonstration Bracket

1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 20-2 Drawing Units

181
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3 4


From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 20-3 Load Tolerances

5 6

Click OK to accept the preferences. From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 20-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

182
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = Bracket1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 20-5 Adding CAD Parts

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

FIGURE 20-6 Bracket 1.igs file

183
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measuring and Creating an Alignment


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 20-7 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 20-8 Measure XY Plane

184
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 20-9 Plane Results

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = Edge Nest. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 20-10 Probes

6 7

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 20-11 Select Plane

185
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

Measure the line.

Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 20-12 Measure Line 1

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then remeasure the feature.

FIGURE 20-13 Line Results

186
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Continue with the command and measure a line.

Take the three or four points on the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 20-14 Measure Line 2

11

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE002. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then remeasure the feature.

FIGURE 20-15 Line Results

187
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001. Select a Line = M_LINE002. Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 20-16 Line/Line coordinate system

13

Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part
1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 20-17 CAD=Part Alignment

2 3 4

Click OK to accept the alignment. From the FILE menu, select SAVE. The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

File name = Surface Profile. Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 20-18 Save As

188
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Scan Measurement Preference


1 2

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

Type of Scanning = Start/ Pause Scan With Trigger. Maximum Distance = 1000000000000. Minimum Distance = 2.0.

FIGURE 20-19 Feature Scanning

From the PART PREFERENCES, select MISCELLANEOUS.

Save Scan Lines as Features = Yes.

FIGURE 20-20 Feature Scanning

Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

189
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Parallel Lock Planes


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 20-21 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK PLANES. Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in). Number of Planes = 100. Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in). Save As = Open Polylines. Click OK.
FIGURE 20-22 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. Offset = 0. Click OK.


FIGURE 20-23 Select Plane

190
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Scan the surface. Press the INSERT key to begin scanning. Move the SMR across the surface contour. Press the INSERT key to pause the scan. Press the HOME key to end the scan.

FIGURE 20-24 Parallel Locked Scanning

NOTE: Scan one surface at a time. 5

Save the scan data.

To keep the scan data, press the INSERT key. To discard the scan data, press the HOME key.
FIGURE 20-25 Keep Data?

Click OK to accept the polyline results.

Show Surface Deviation


1

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

191
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Select the M_SURFACE###-### polyline features.

Readings = checked. Whiskers = checked.

FIGURE 20-26 Surface Whiskers

Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Rescale Whiskers
The whiskers will now give a graphical display of deviation to the CAD surface. A green whisker shows a deviation less than the tolerance. A yellow whisker shows deviation greater than seventy-five percent of the tolerance. A red whisker shows a deviation greater than the tolerance. 1 2 3

From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > DECREASE. This will reduce the whisker length. From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > INCREASE. This will increase the whisker length. Rescale the Whiskers on the part to best view the deviation.

FIGURE 20-27 Whiskers

192
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Surface Profile. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 20-28 Enter Header Information

The REPORT LIST dialog box shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. Select all M_SURFACE###-### features. All other features unchecked. Click OK.
FIGURE 20-29 Report List

The REPORT PREVIEW dialog box shows a preview of the report.

193
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Surface Profile. Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 20-30 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit the REPORT PREVIEW dialog box. Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

194
Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measurement


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use points for inspection. After completing this section, the student will be able to use the surface point commands to inspect parts.

Point Measurements
Comp Off and Comp Axis
Comp Off points do not compensate. The point will be taken at the center of the SMR. These points are idea for use in all Device Position commands and to check movement in the part or measurement device. Comp Axis points will compensate along a coordinate axis, so they may only be used to measure surfaces that are parallel to the coordinate planes: , and . the HOME key must be pressed after pulling away coordinate plane the point will compensate towards. to the

High Point and Low Point


These commands will find the point furthest (High Point) or nearest (Low Point) to a Plane, Line, or Point. When the Scan Measurement Part Preference is On, these commands capture points as it receives them from the measurement device.

Surface Measurements
If the surface is not parallel to a coordinate plane, the command must be used. This command uses three or more measured points and a compensation point to calculate a single point on a small planar surface.
Probe Center XYZ to be inspected

How do we determine the vector? Surface

195
Chapter 21: Point Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 The command guides the measurement device to a specific XYZ location to measure a point.
Home In Zone (diameter) Home In Vector

Final Compensated Point

CAM2 Measure X provides three different SMR compensation options for the Home in command. Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known). Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface. This direction is the normal vector of the surface, at the XYZ point location. Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a miniplane (INSERT key) and one compensation point (HOME key).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option 2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3. Since it is very difficult to move the SMR to an exact XYZ location, the Home In command requires a Home In Zone. The surface you are measuring should approximate a flat plane within the Home In zone. If the surface is curved, . your measurement may include
Home In Vector
Measured point with error
R Zo R

Cu

at rv

ur

196
Chapter 21: Point Measurement

Zo ne

ne

Surface

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 To calculate the maximum Home In Zone, use the following equation:
R Zone:= R Curvature 2
_

(R Curvature _ ErrorCosine)2

Enter the maximum acceptable cosine error and the radius of curvature of the surface and get the maximum allowable Home In Zone radius. Usually, the cosine error will be much smaller than the accuracy of the measurement device. Checking the Same Points on Another Part The list of points in the Home In command may be saved to file. CAM2 Measure X creates an ASCII text file with all the data. The Home In command can import the file to check the same location on another similar part. The Home In file has the extension *.hmi. The Home In command also saves and imports the ACL format (GOTO/ X, Y, Z, I, J, K). The ACL file has the extension *.acl.

Important Topics - Point Measurement


Home In Point files (*.hmi) allow you to save a series of home-in points to be saved for use in other measurement sessions. The Select Surface Home In option requires a CAD surface.

197
Chapter 21: Point Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical


PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement
1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 22-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 22-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK to accept the preferences.

199
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 22-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = Bracket1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 22-4 Adding CAD Parts

200
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

FIGURE 22-5 Bracket 1.igs file

Measuring the Alignment Features


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 22-6 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

201
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 22-7 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then remeasure the feature.

FIGURE 22-8 Plane Results

5 6

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES. Select the EDGE NEST SMR.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = Edge Nest. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 22-9 Probes

202
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7 8


From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 22-10 Select Plane

Measure the line.

Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 22-11 Measure Line 1

10

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-12 Line Results

203
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Continue with the command and measure a line.

Take the three or four points along the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 22-13 Measure Line 2

12

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE002. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-14 Line Results

FIGURE 22-15 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

204
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Constructing the Alignment


The correct amount of measured features for a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system has been measured. These features are a measured match for the nominal coordinate system. 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001. Select a Line = M_LINE002. Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 22-16 Line/Line Coordinate System

2 3

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 22-17 CAD=Part Alignment

205
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Click OK to accept the alignment.

FIGURE 22-18 Aligned to CAD Model

High Points
1 2

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger Maximum Distance = 1000000000000. Minimum Distance = 0.0.

FIGURE 22-19 Scan Measurement Preference

Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

NOTE: The SCAN MEASUREMENT may be turned on or off using the X key on the keyboard.

206
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 22-20 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HIGH POINT.

Select a Feature = M_PLANE001. Feature Type = Plane Reducible. Click OK.

FIGURE 22-21 Select Feature

Place the SMR on the top of the sphere. Press the INSERT key and scan over the top of the surface. Press the INSERT key to pause the scan. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 22-22 Measure High Point

207
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.
FIGURE 22-23 Point Results

Home-in Options
Before using the Home-in function to inspect points, create some of the nominal points that will be checked.
Label X Y Z

HMI_1 HMI_2 HMI_3 1

55.00 55.00 55.00

36.50 49.00 25.00

41.00 66.20 14.49

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES.

Enter the nominal information from the table above. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Choose the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK to create the point

FIGURE 22-24 Construct Point Enter Values

208
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Take a look at the results.

Label = see table. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 22-25 Point Results

3 4 5

Repeat these steps for each point. From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

Type of Scanning = No Scanning.

FIGURE 22-26 Scan Measurement Preference

Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

209
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K


1 2

From MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN. Click the ADD button.

Coordinate = N_HMI_1. Approach Vector: I = 0, J = -1, K = 0. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Rotation Angle = 0. Home-In Zone = 1.0. Approach Vector = KEY IN. Click OK.
FIGURE 22-27 Create Home In Point

NOTE: The approach vector is 0,-1,0. This is known because of the orientation of the part. The approach is from the negative Y direction, so a negative J value is used. Note how only the Y value will change when the point is measured.

Three Coordinates, Select Surface


1

Click the ADD button.

Coordinate = N_HMI_2. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Rotation Angle = 0. Home-In Zone = 1.0. Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE. Click OK.
FIGURE 22-28 Create Home In Point

NOTE: The approach vector will be extracted from the surface, normal to the surface at the location of the nominal point.

210
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Three Coordinates, Sample Surface


1

Click the ADD button.

Coordinate = N_HMI_3. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Rotation Angle = 0. Home-In Zone = 1.0. Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE. Click OK.
FIGURE 22-29 Create Home In Point

NOTE: The approach vector is calculated from the small sampled plane that is digitized within a enlarged Home In Zone. This method should be used in the absence of CAD surfaces.

Save the Home In File


Before measuring the Home In Points, save the points to a file that may be imported directly into the Home In command later. This is an excellent way of taking point and vector data on one part and then using the XYZ, IJK data to inspect another part using the Home In format. 1

Click the EXPORT FILE button.

File name = your initials Home In. Save as Type = Home In Files (*.hmi). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 22-30 Save HIM file.

Measure the Home In Points


1 2

Click the OK button in the HOME IN POINT dialog box to start measuring the three points. Measure HMI_1.

NOTE: One measurement point is required to capture the point. The 211
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 measured point will be offset for the radius of the probe along the surface vector that was entered. 3

Take a look at the results.

Label = HMI_1. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-31 Point Results

CAM2 Measure is prompting the operator to select a surface of HMI_2.

Using the mouse click on the top surface. Select the face on the outer surface of the part.

S1

S2

FIGURE 22-32 Select Surface

Measure HMI_2.

NOTE: One measurement point and one compensation point is required to capture the point. The compensation point is required to determine which side of the CAD surface the point was measured.

212
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Take a look at the results.

Label = HMI_2. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the feature.

FIGURE 22-33 Point Results

Measure HMI_3.

NOTE: Four measurement points and one compensation point are required to capture the point. The first three measurement and compensation points are used to determine the surface vector. The last measurement point is used to capture the point. 8

Take a look at the results.

Label = HMI_3. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the feature.

FIGURE 22-34 Point Results

213
Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement


Sheet Metal Measurements
OBJECTIVE: To understand how sheet metal measurements differ from regular measurement types. The student will learn techniques on how to measure sheet metal trim lines.

Simple Features
Sheet metal measurements are very similar to ordinary measurements. , , , and are measured with the same method as normal measurements, with the exception of adding a material thickness. The reason for material thickness is due to the difficulty keeping the SMR on the edge of a very thin piece of sheet metal. Falling off the edge of the sheet metal would cause an incorrect value for feature size and incorrect position.

Radius for Compensation

Material Edge

Probe Equator

CAM2 Measure X compensates for the possibility of falling off the edge with simple geometry functions using the measured plane of projection and the thickness value entered for the material.

Ball Probe

Unique Sheet Metal Measurements


There are two specific sheet metal measurements: Edge Point and Hemmed Edge Point. The Trimmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on the sheet metal edge, which may then be compared to a nominal line or curve representing the nominal edge. The Hemmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on a hemmed edge. A hemmed edge is one piece of sheet metal folded over the end of another piece of sheet metal, like on the edge of a car door.

215
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Both the Trimmed Edge and the Hemmed Edge points require a sheet metal thickness value. Both are measured by digitizing three points near the edge, in a small plane, and two points on the edge, next to the plane. The resulting point compensates for the SMR and the sheet metal thickness and calculates a point.

Surface Points
Sheet metal parts may also be measured using the surface point commands, Home In, Inspect Surface, and Surface Point. Since these commands are not specific to sheet metal measurements, the material thickness must be activated manually. The M hot key displays the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog box while any sheet metal command is active. Material Thickness may also be set in preferences. Only sheet metal commands will use the material thickness value. CAD Side and Other Side There are situations with many sheet metal parts where the nominal point is on the other side of the sheet metal surface. Since the material thickness is constant throughout the part, CAM2 Measure allows the measurement of a sheet metal part from the other side. This setting is all about what side of the part that is being touched with the SMR, the CAD SIDE, or the OTHER SIDE.

CAD Side

Other Side (Nominal)

FIGURE 23-1 Other Side

216
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dynamic Nominals
With CAM2 Measure X, any type of nominal feature may be associated to any type of measured feature. This is called Dynamic Nominals. For Example:

Nominal Line

Measured Circle

FIGURE 23-2 Dynamic Nominals

Measured circles may use a nominal line to compare X, Y and Z values. The nominal line does not contain a diameter. CAM2 Measure will deactivate the diameter tolerance.

Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture Measurement


It is important to enter the correct material thickness for sheet metal measurements. For Inspect Surface points to compensate through the material, the OTHER SIDE Sheet Metal option will be selected. Dynamic nominals will not auto-nominal. They must associated manually.

217
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE
1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 24-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 24-2 Load Tolerances

From the PART PREFERENCES, click MATERIAL.

Material Compensation = checked. Direction = CAD Side. Thickness = Single. Material Thickness = 3.175.

FIGURE 24-3 Material Compensation

219
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6 7


Click OK to accept the preferences. From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = Shell1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 24-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 8

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = Shell1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 24-5 Adding CAD Parts

220
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen (or press the 7 key).

FIGURE 24-6 Shell1.igs

Constructing Nominals
10

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions. Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 24-7 Construct P1

221
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Take a look at the results.

Label = P1. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 24-8 Circle Results

12

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 24-9 Construct P2

222
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13

Take a look at the results.

Label = P2. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 24-10 Circle Results

14

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Using the mouse click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 24-11 Construct P3

223
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 15

Take a look at the results.

Label = P3. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 24-12 Circle Results

Using the Measurement Template


16

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 24-13 Probes

17

From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE. .

Click the FROM SCREEN button

Using the mouse, select the 3 nominal circles P1, P2, and P3. Click the right mouse button to return to the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog. Change the MEASURE AS drop downs from CIRCLE to PLNPNT (Planar Point).
FIGURE 24-14 Measurement Template

224
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 18 19 20

Click OK in the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog to measure the three circles. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.

Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-15 Measure XY Plane

21

Measure P1.

Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-16 Measure P1

22

Click OK to accept the point.

225
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 23 24

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.

Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-17 Measure XY Plane

25

Measure P2.

Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-18 Measure P2

26 27

Click OK to accept the point. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK. 226

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 28

Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-19 Measure XY Plane

29

Measure P3.

Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-20 Measure P3

30

Click OK to accept the point.

Iterative Alignment
1

Fom the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Select M_P1, M_P2 and M_P3. Set Weights = unchecked. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 24-21 Iterative Alignment

227
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Click OK to accept the alignment.

Compare to Straight Nominal Edge


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a line with 2 points. Use the mouse to click 2 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points right. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 24-22 Construct Nominal Line

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. Click OK to accept the line.

FIGURE 24-23 Line Results

3 4

From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < TRIMMED POINT. Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

228
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.

Measure the plane on the top of the shell. Take four or five points on the top of the shell by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-24 Measure Plane

Measure the edge.

Take two or three points on the edge by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the edge and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-25 Construct Nominal Line

229
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Select Nominal = N_LINE001.

FIGURE 24-26 Trimmed Point Results

Click the REPORT tab and view the results.

FIGURE 24-27 Trimmed Point Results

10

Click OK to accept the point.

230
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compare Nominal Circles


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 24-28 Construct Circle 13

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE_13. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 24-29 Circle Results

231
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch. Nest = 0.25 diameter pin nest. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 24-30 Probes

4 5 6 7

From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < CIRCLE. Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.

Measure the plane on the side of the shell. Take four or five points on the side of the shell by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-31 Measure Plane

232
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

Measure the circle.

Take three or four points on the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the circle and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-32 Measure Circle

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Select Nominal = N_CIRCLE_13.

FIGURE 24-33 Measured Circle Results

10 11

Click the REPORT tab to view the results. Click OK to accept the circle.

233
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compare Nominal Round Slots


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select ROUND SLOT < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 6 points (or 2 circles with 3 points each). Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions. Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector. Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points to the right. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 24-34 Construct Slot F

Take a look at the results.

Label = SLOT_F. Click OK to accept the slot.

FIGURE 24-35 Round Slot Results

3 4

From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < ROUND SLOT. Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

234
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.

Measure the plane on the top of the shell. Take four or five points on the top of the shell by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-36 Measure Plane

Measure the slot.

Take three or four points on the first end of the slot by pressing the INSERT key. Pull to the center of the arc and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-37 Measure Round Slot

235
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Take three or four points on the second end of the slot by pressing the INSERT key. Pull to the center of the arc and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 24-37 Measure Round Slot

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Select Nominal = N_SLOT_F.

FIGURE 24-38 Round Slot Results

9 10

Click the REPORT tab to view the results. Click OK to accept the slot.

Compare Nominal Surfaces


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 24-39 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

236
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Click the M hot key on the keyboard to bring up the Material Thickness dialog box.

Material Compensation = checked. Direction = Other Side. Thickness = Single. Material Thickness = 3.175.

FIGURE 24-40 Material Compensation

4 5

Click OK to accept the material thickness. Measure a point on the opposite side of the material.

Move the SMR to the underside of the part. When the surface turns red click the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and click the HOME key.
FIGURE 24-41

Note: Even though you took the point on the opposite side of the part CAM2 Measure compensated the extra amount for the material.

237
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFACE001.

FIGURE 24-42 Inspect Surface Results

Click OK to accept the point.

238
Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Round Tubing


Objective - The instructor will introduce the tube measurement routines in CAM2 Measure. Upon completion of this section, the student will be able to measure tubes, construct nominal tubes, and generate an inspection report.

Tubing Part Preferences

FIGURE 25-1 Tubing Preferences

Tubing Turn Direction - Clockwise or Counterclockwise. This preference will be based upon the tube-bending machine. When the machine turns the tube it may be rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise (default) direction. Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and measurement report. Tubing Turn Angle - Relative or Absolute. This preference will be based upon the bending machine. When the machine bends the angle the bend is referenced to the first segment (absolute) or to the last segment (relative default). Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and measurement report. Break Point Type - Intersection or Segment End. This preference will construct the intersection points from the intersection of the cylinder segments (Intersection - default) or the intersections of the cylinders with the toroid (Segment End). Measure Tube Bends - All Bends or Required Bends. This preference determines if the toroid of the tube will be measured. When set to All Bends, you will measure the cylinders and bends. When set to Required Bends (default), only bend angles of 180 degrees will be measured.

239
Chapter 25: Round Tubing

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measure Tube
Round Tube
The MEASURE ROUND TUBE command links a series of plane, cylinder and torus commands to construct a single round tube. End B is the first feature to be measured and will be measured as a plane. End A is the last feature to be measured and is also measured as a plane.

Rectangular Tube
The MEASURE RECTANGULAR TUBE command links a series of plane commands together to construct a single rectangular tube.

Tube Fitting
The MEASURE TUBE FITTING command allows you to design a tube by measuring points in space to define the tube segments. A plane and cylinder at the ends of the tube is required. The plane and cylinder are used to determine the starting and ending points of the tube as well as the angle to the surface.

Construct Tube
Enter XYZ
Round The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube diameter and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube. Rectangular The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube width, tube height, and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Enter PTB
Round The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube diameter and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube. Rectangular The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube width, tube height, and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

240
Chapter 25: Round Tubing

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

From Features
A tube may be constructed from measured, constructed, or nominal geometry. Two planes, a series of cylinders, and torids are selected to construct a tube.

Breakpoints
The breakpoints of a constructed or nominal tube may be added as separate features for use in alignment, construction, or dimension commands.

Importing Data
Import CSV Select a comma-delimited file that contains the XYZ or PTB information for a tube. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, or XYZ value, bend radius and diameter information. The format for this command should be: Tube diameter 01, X, Y, Z, 0, 0, 0, 0 02, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius 03, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius ##, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, 0 NOTE: If the CONSTRUCT > TUBE > ENTER XYZ is used, only the X, Y, Z and Bend Radius information is needed. The PTB fields may be left blank. The X, Y, Z fields are not required for the ENTER PTB command. Import BendPro Select a tube from the BendPro database. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, Bend Radius and diameter information that was used to create the tube. From Polyline Select a polyline from the CAD view and the XYZ breakpoint list will be populated with the vertices of the polyline.

241
Chapter 25: Round Tubing

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Tube Reporting
Tube Correction Report
TubeBendCorrection is a report format specifically designed for calculating tube spring back. The Pull Turn Bend of the measured tube will be compared to the Pull Turn Bend of the nominal tube and a correction report will be generated. The correction report provides you with Pull Turn Bend information that will output a tube to match the nominal.

Important Topics - Round Tubing


The Tubing Preferences are based upon the settings of the tube bending machine. The tubing bend radius may be measured for each bend or entered (default) for the tube. If a bend angle is 180 degrees, you must measure the bend as a torus. The tubing commands may be used in the Learn/Execute program to create part programs.

242
Chapter 25: Round Tubing

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical


Practical Exercise
1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 26-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 26-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK to accept the preferences.

243
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measuring a Tube
1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES. SMR = 0.5 Inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 26-3 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will step you through the measurement of a tube by linking the plane and cylinder commands together. 3

Measure End B of the tube as a plane. Take four or five points on the front of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-4 Measure Plane

Click OK to accept the plane.

244
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-5 Measure First Segment

6 7

Click OK to accept the cylinder. Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-6 Measure Second Segment

Click OK to accept the cylinder.

245
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-7 Measure Third Segment

10 11

Click OK to accept the cylinder. Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-8 Measure Fourth Segment

12

Click OK to accept the cylinder.

246
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13

Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-9 Measure Fifth Segment

14

Click OK to accept the cylinder.

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a cylinder. 15

Press the HOME key to cancel the cylinder measurment.

Press the <BACK> == NO button to confirm that there are no more segments to measure.
FIGURE 26-10 Last Segment?

16

Measure End A of the tube as a plane. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-11 Measure Plane

247
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 17 18


Click OK to accept the plane. The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

Tube Diameter = 6.35. Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70. Click OK.

FIGURE 26-12 Tube Bend Information

19

Click OK to accept the tube.

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Tube Measurement. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 26-13 Enter Header Information

248
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 26-14 Report List

5 6

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report. Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Tube Measurement. Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 26-15 Save Report

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

249
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8 9 10


Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES. From the FILE menu, select SAVE. The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

File name = Tube Measurement. Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 26-16 Save As

250
Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical


Practical Exercise
Preparing the Learn Execute file
1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 27-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming
1

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/ EXECUTE.

251
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Select CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln). Click OK.
FIGURE 27-3 Choose File type

You will see the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This shows you the instructions the program currently contains.

FIGURE 27-4 Offline Programing Dialog

Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window. This will begin the On-Line Learn program.

Constructing a Nominal Tube


1 2

From the CONSTRUCT Menu, select TUBE > ENTER XYZ. Enter the Tube type and Diameter. Select the ROUND toggle button. Diameter = 6.35.

252
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Enter the first point.

X = 0.0. Y = 0.0. Z = 0.0. Bend Radius = 0.0. Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-5 Enter Breakpoint

4 5

Click the ADD button. Enter the second point.

X =25.0. Y = 0.0. Z = 0.0. Bend Radius = 12.7. Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-6 Enter Breakpoint

Click the ADD button.

253
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Enter the third point.

X = 100.0. Y = -27.5. Z = 12.0. Bend Radius = 12.7. Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-7 Enter Breakpoint

8 9

Click the ADD button. Enter the fourth point.

X = 100.0. Y = 282.5. Z = 12.0. Bend Radius = 12.7. Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-8 Enter Breakpoint

10

Click the ADD button.

254
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Enter the fifth point.

X = 25.0. Y = 255.0. Z = 0.0. Bend Radius = 12.7. Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-9 Enter Breakpoint

12 13

Click the ADD button. Enter the last point. X = 0.0. Y = 255.0. Z = 0.0. Bend Radius = 12.7. Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-10 Enter Breakpoint

14 15 16 17

Click the ADD button. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click the OK button. Click the OK button to accept the tube.

255
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Construct Tube Points


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select TUBE > BREAKPOINTS.

Tube = N_TUBE001. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-11

Click OK to the 6 points created dialog.

Measuring a Tube
1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 0.5 inch. Nest = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-12 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

Notice how CAM2 Measure steps through the measurement of a tube by linking the plane and cylinder commands.

256
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure End B of the tube as a plane. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 27-13 Measure Plane

4 5

Click OK to accept the plane. Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-14 Measure First Segment

Click OK to accept the cylinder.

257
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-15 Measure Second Segment

8 9

Click OK to accept the cylinder. Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-16 Measure Third Segment

10

Click OK to accept the cylinder results.

258
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-17 Measure Fourth Segment

12 13

Click OK to accept the cylinder. Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-18 Measure Fifth Segment

14

Click OK to accept the cylinder.

259
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a cylinder. 15

Press the Back button to tell CAM2 you are finished measuring.

Press the <BACK> == NO button to confirm that there are no more segments to measure.
FIGURE 27-19 Last Segment?

16

Measure End A of the tube as a plane. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 27-20 Measure Plane

17 18

Click OK to accept the plane. The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

Tube Diameter = 6.35. Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-21 Tube Bend Information

260
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 19

Select the NOMINALS tab.

Select Nominal = N_TUBE001.

FIGURE 27-22 Tube Results

20

Press the OK button to accept the tube.

Tube Alignment
1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

Primary Point = C_TUBE001-BP1. Secondary Point = C_TUBE001-BP2. Tertiary Point = C_TUBE001-BP6. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 27-23 Feature Alignment

Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP1.

Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP1. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-24 Nominal Breakpoint

261
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP2.

Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP2. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-25 Nominal Breakpoint

Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP6.

Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP6. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-26 Nominal Breakpoint

Click OK to accept the alignment.

Printing a Report
1 2

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button.

262
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Tube Program. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 27-27 Enter Header Information

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 27-28 Report List

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

263
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Tube Program. Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 27-29 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

End Learn.
1

Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button.

FIGURE 27-30 Offline Learn/Execute

264
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

Creator = your name. Part Name = Tube Program. Drawing Revision Number = A. Click SAVE.

FIGURE 27-31 Saving the Learn/Execute

From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

265
Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building


Objective - The instructor will introduce techniques that may be used to position parts into an assembly. Upon completion of this section, the student will be able to position parts using the DRO Window.

Tool Building
This section deals with building an assembly with known data. These techniques are used to find the high or low surface or out of round locations for a circle, cylinder or sphere.

DRO Window
The DRO window may be assigned to a measured, constructed, or nominal feature. The DRO window will display the deviation between the SMR to the color is based upon the feature tolerance selected feature. The (nominal tolerances will be based upon the feature default). A green value is in tolerance. A yellow value is in tolerance, but above 75% of the tolerance value. A red value is out of tolerance. The DRO Window on a feature will be compensated for the SMR. The DRO Window command is found in Review Features. The window may be modified by clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Dynamic DRO Window


The Dynamic DRO Window will automatically switch between point and surface features. The DRO window may be modified for Points or Surfaces by clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Important Topics - Tool Building


DRO Windows may be created to show the deviation of the measurement device to the feature. The Dynamic DRO Window may be used on points and surfaces. Nominal Features will use the default part tolerance to display the green (in tolerance), yellow (tolerance warning) or red (out of tolerance) deviation colors.

267
Chapter 28: Tool Building

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical


Practical Exercise
1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 29-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 29-2 Load Tolerances

5 6

Click OK to accept the preferences. From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

FIGURE 29-3 FARO CAD Translator

269
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 29-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 29-4 Adding CAD Parts

270
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

FIGURE 29-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

Aligning to the CAD


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 29-6 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

271
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure Sphere A.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-7 Measure Sphere A

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_A.

FIGURE 29-8 Sphere Results

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 29-9 Results Nominal Tab

272
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Enter the nominal information.

X= -135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diameter = 12.0. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 29-10 Construct Sphere Enter Values

7 8

Click OK to accept the sphere. Measure Sphere B.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-11 Measure Sphere B

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_B.

FIGURE 29-12 Sphere Results

273
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 29-13 Results Nominal Tab

11

Enter the nominal information.

X= 135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diameter = 12.0. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 29-14 Construct Sphere Enter Values

12 13

Click OK to accept the sphere. Measure Sphere C.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-15 Measure Sphere C

274
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 14

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_C.

FIGURE 29-16 Sphere Results

15

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 29-17 Results Nominal Tab

16

Enter the nominal information.

X= -135.0, Y = 50.0, Z = 28.5, Diameter = 12.00. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 29-18 Construct Sphere Enter Values

275
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 17

Click OK to accept the sphere.

Iterative Alignment
1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Selected Choices = M_SPHERE_A, M_SPHERE_B, M_SPHERE_C. Set Weights = unchecked. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 29-19 Iterative Alignment

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may not be seen since the calculation should solve very quickly.

Take a look at the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance. Notice the error between each of the measured spheres and its associated nominal.

FIGURE 29-20 Iterative Alignment Results

3 4

Click OK to accept the alignment. From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

276
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

File name = Tool Building. Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 29-21 Save As

Import Model
1

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = Bracket3.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 29-22 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

277
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = Bracket3.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 29-23 Adding CAD Parts

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions. Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 29-24 Construct Circle

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 29-25 Circle Results

278
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions. Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part. Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 29-26 Construct Circle

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE002. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 29-27 Circle Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

Select a Line = N_CIRCLE001. Distance = 25.4. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 29-28 Move IJK

NOTE: The DISTANCE value is based upon the location of the center of 279
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 the SMR from the center of the circle. 8

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT001. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 29-29 Point Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

Select a Line = N_CIRCLE002. Distance = 25.4. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 29-30 Move IJK

10

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT002. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 29-31 Point Results

280
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a DRO window on a Nominal


1 2

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Add a DRO window for point 1.

Click on N_POINT001. Click the DRO button.


FIGURE 29-32 Adding a DRO

Add a DRO window for point 2.

Click on N_POINT002. Click the DRO button.


FIGURE 29-33 Adding a DRO

4 5

Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES. Reposition the DRO Windows so both can be seen easily.

FIGURE 29-34 DRO Windows

Positioning the Bracket


1 2

Place the bracket on the surface plate so that the back of the plate faces towards cylinder G. Insert the two screws, but do not tighten. 281
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Place the 0.250 SHANK WITH 1INCH OFFSET nest on the 1.5 INCH SMR. Place the SMR in the hole of circle 1. Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 1 DRO are green. Tighten the screw closest to circle 1. Place the SMR in the hole of circle 2. Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 2 DRO are green. Verify that point 1 is still green by placing the SMR in the hole of circle 1. Once both points read green, tighten both screws.

Recording the Tool Position


1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < COMP OFF. Measure Point 1.

Place the SMR in the hole of circle 1. Press the INSERT key. Press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-35 Measure Point

282
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT001.

FIGURE 29-36 Point Results

4 5

Click OK to accept the point. Measure Point 2.

Place the SMR in the hole of circle 2. Press the INSERT key. press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-37 Measure Point

Take a look at the results.

Label = POINT002.

FIGURE 29-38 Point Results

283
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7 8


Click OK to accept the point. From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

Move the SMR close to the part; the nearest surface will turn red. Press the INSERT key. Pull the probe away from the surface, press the HOME key.
FIGURE 29-39 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

Take a look at the results.

The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the 3D deviation to the surface. Click OK.

FIGURE 29-40 Inspect Surface Point Results

10

Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

284
Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions


OBJECTIVE: Understand how to apply GD&T (Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing) to CAM2 features. After completing this section the student will be able to apply GD&T to part inspection.

Geometric Characteristics and Symbols


FLATNESS STRAIGHTNESS CIRCULARITY (ROUNDNESS) CYLINDRICITY PERPENDICULARITY ANGULARITY PARALLELISM POSITION CONCENTRICITY
M

MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION (MMC) REGARDLESS OF FEATURE SIZE (RFS) DIAMETRICAL (CYLINDRICAL) TOLERANCE ZONE OR FEATURE BASIC, OR EXACT, DIMENSION DATUM FEATURE SYMBOL

8.00

.020 .250

A B C

FEATURE CONTROL FRAME

C1

DATUM TARGET

Form Dimensions
Form dimensions are the simplest of the GD&T because the measurement is compared to 0.0 or perfect geometry. The Datum is the feature itself. CAM2 Measure X creates a form feature that uses the measured data from a plane, line, circle, or cylinder to calculate the out of tolerance value.

285
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Orientation Dimensions
Orientation dimensions define the gap or interference created when two surfaces are put together. These dimensions are only a little more complicated because they require a feature and a datum. The datum is considered and the value of the orientation dimension is over the length of the feature, or an entered value.

Parallelism
Feature

When two parallel planes come together, they are supposed to mate flush. If they are not parallel, when they come together, a gap is created. Parallelism is the gap. Parallelism can be used with any or reducible features.

Datum

Parallelism Perpendicularity

Perpendicularity
Perpendicularity is intended to show the gap created by the features at a to the datum. Perpendicularity can be used with any or reducible features.

Feature

Datum

Concentricity
This tells if a line reducible feature is on the same center-line as the datum. This is intended to see if a pin and a hole will mate without interference. If the pin is not concentric to a hole (i.e., the pin is angled with too drastically) then the pin will the edges of the hole.
Feature

Datum

x 2 = Concentricity

True Position Dimensions


True Position is a fairly simple concept. The feature control frame appears to be complicated, but its not. Simply align to Datums A, B and C using a CAD = PART alignment and check the position. Associate the proper In the 286
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

in the RESULTS dialog box. tab turn on MMC or RFS depending on

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 which one is indicated. Change the RFS or MMC tolerance to the value indicated in the control frame. Multiple datum schemes require multiple alignments.

RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)


This condition of True Position tolerance is the tolerance specified for the position of a feature - Regardless of the Feature Size. The size is generally the diameter of a circle.
Me as
Tol. Z
l mina No ed ur

e on

Since this is a 2D value, the nominal point is projected to the measured plane of the circle RFS or MMC before the distance is calculated. The 2D distance between the center of the Nominal Circle to the Measured Circle times two (2) is the RFS and MMC.

MMC (Maximum Material Condition)


Another condition of True Position tolerance is the tolerance specified for the position of a feature using the Maximum Material Condition. The positional tolerance changes according to the measured size of the feature.

Outer Tolera nc e
Inner Toler an c
Bonus Tol. Tol. Zone

ACTUAL

For a hole, the diameter at the lower end of the NOMINAL tolerance band (as small as it should get) is the value used for MMC calculation. For a pin, the diameter at the upper end of the tolerance band (as big as it should get) is the value used for MMC calculation. If the size of the feature is not at the maximum material condition, the difference between the actual size and the maximum material condition is added as a bonus to the positional tolerance. As the hole gets bigger, the positional tolerance increases. This means that even if the center of the hole is out of tolerance, a pin inserted in the hole would have some room to fit. As the pin gets smaller, the positional tolerance increases. This means that even if the center of the pin is out of tolerance, the pin would fit into the hole.

287
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 For example: The MMC tolerance on a hole is 0.50, the nominal diameter is 20.0 0.10. If the hole is at its smallest (Maximum Material Condition), the stated MMC tolerance applies. The larger the hole, the more tolerance is allowed until the upper tolerance limit of the hole is reached (Least Material Condition). Diameter: 20.0 0.10 MMC Tolerance: 0.50 Positional Tolerance 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70

Feature Size 19.90 19.95 20.00 20.05 20.10

This is MMC

This is LMC

If MMC is not specified, RFS is implied. RFS and MMC are set in the TOLERANCE tab for the feature. Access the TOLERANCE tab of a feature through the RESULTS or REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

Important Topics - Advanced Dimensions


If MMC is not specified on the print, RFS tolerance can be assumed. When measuring to true position tolerances, the alignment in CAM2 Measure X must be based on the drawing datums. The CAM2 Measure X software stores the tolerance information with each feature individually. All the control frame information (diameter, tolerances, true position information, roundness, etc.) is assigned to the feature.

288
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical


Practical Exercise
Use a drawing and a CAD file for nominal information. Construct nominal features from the CAD model, construct a nominal coordinate system, measure alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, create advance dimensions, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work. Check the part following the dimensions on this drawing. Start by locating the Datum Feature Symbols.
5 4 3 2 1

65 [2.56]
D

20 [.787] 167 [6.575]

.50

.50 B
130 [5.118]

B
50 [1.969] 15 [.591] 25 [.984] 25 [.984] 15 [.591] 30 50 [1.181] 65 [1.969] [2.559] 160 [6.299] 4X 170 [6.693] 50 [1.969] .50 C 5 [.197] 20 [.787] 15 [.591]

50 [1.969] 65 [2.559] 15 [.591]

20 [.787]

20 [.787]

265 [10.433]

B
240 [9.449] 300 [11.811]

255 [10.04]

150 [5.906]

C
60 [2.362] 30 [1.181] 15
A

100 50 [3.94] .50 A [1.969]

40 [1.575] 15 15 [.591] [.591] EQ. SP. ON A 20 [0.798] +0.25 140 [5.512] BC -0.10
1.0 M A B C

15 [.591] 30 [1.181]

8X

.50

25 [.984]

SECTION B-B
03FRM049-REV 1

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. 4 3

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.01 1
THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

63

FINSH REQUIRED

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

Armed with Quality

TITLE

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE


2 1

FIGURE 31-1 FARO Demonstration Part

289
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1 2


From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 31-2 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 31-3 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

290
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/ Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 31-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 31-5 Adding CAD Parts

291
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 31-6 FARO_Demo_Part3 CAD file

Constructing Nominals
In this exercise, we will introduce the method for creating a Nominal Coordinate system. If the imported CAD file contains a coordinate system that is located off the part, it is usually difficult to create a measured coordinate system to match it. If that is the case, a nominal coordinate system may be created on the CAD model using the CAD features. Next, those features of the part will be measured, and a measured coordinate system will be constructed. For a proper alignment, the Nominal Coordinate system created will then be associated to the Constructed Coordinate System using the CAD=PART alignment command. 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL. CAM2 Measure X will create a plane with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.
FIGURE 31-7 Construct XY Plane

292
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Choose the direction of the plane.

Click the LEFT mouse button to switch the vector so that it points up. Click the RIGHT mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 31-8 Choose Direction Vector

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-9 Nominal Plane Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure X will create a line with 2 points. Use the mouse to click a point on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.
FIGURE 31-10 Construct X Axis

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to define the line. 293
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-11 Nominal Line Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure X will create a circle with 3 points. Left mouse click a point on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.
FIGURE 31-12 Construct Circle 9

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to define the circle. 7

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE_9. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-13 Circle Results

294
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a Nominal Alignment


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

Select a Plane = N_PLANE001. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = N_LINE001. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = N_CIRCLE_9. Choose the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 31-14 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

Measure the Datum Features


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-15 Probes

295
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 3


From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-16 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_A. Datum = A. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-17 Plane Results

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-18 Probes

296
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6 7


From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 31-19 Select Plane

Measure Datum B as a line. Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-20 Measure X Axis

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_B. Datum = B. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-21 Line Results

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels.

297
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES. SMR = 0.5 Inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-22 Probes

11 12

From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER. Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 31-23 Measure Cylinder 9

13

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_C. Datum = C. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-24 Cylinder Results

298
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Constructing the Measured Alignment


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A. Select a Line = M_DATUM_C. Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 31-25 Construct Point Line/Feature

2 3

Click OK to accept the point. From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = C_POINT001. Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 31-26 3-2-1 Coordinate System

4 5

Click OK to accept the coordinate system results. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = N_COORDSYS001. Scale Option = NONE. Click OK.
FIGURE 31-27 CAD=Part Alignment

299
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click OK to accept the alignment results.

FIGURE 31-28 Aligned to CAD

300
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Form Dimensions
With an alignment between the measured features and nominal features continue with the GD&T form dimensions. 1

From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

Tolerance = 0.50. Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A. Click OK.

FIGURE 31-29 Flatness

2 3

Click OK to accept the flatness. From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

Tolerance = 0.50. Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B. Click OK.

FIGURE 31-30 Straightness

4 5

Click OK to accept the straightness. From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

Tolerance = 0.50. Datum = A. Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C. Click OK.


FIGURE 31-31 Perpendicularity

Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

301
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore has not been measured; however, it is possible to measure inside a GD&T command. 7

From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

Tolerance = 0.50. Datum = C. Select a Feature = Measure as Cylinder. Click OK.


FIGURE 31-32 Concentricity

Measure the cylinder 10.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 31-33 Measure Cylinder10

Take a look at the results.

Label = CYLINDER010. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-34 Cylinder Results

10

Click OK to accept the concentricity.

302
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Position Dimensions
1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-35 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 31-36 Select Plane

Measure Circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 31-37 Measure Circle 1

A nominal circle from the CAD model is automatically associated to the measured circle because it is near the measured circle.

303
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Click the TOLERANCES tab.

X = unchecked. Y = unchecked. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.0. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 31-38 Set Tolerances

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This updates the circle tolerances for this file, and all the future circles will have these tolerance values. Click OK to accept the circle. Measure will continue to measue circles until the command is canceled.

7 8

Continue measuring all eight circles in the pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 31-39 Measure Circles 2 -8

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 2

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. 304

Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Advanced Dimensioning. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 31-40 Enter Header Information

305
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Notes = unchecked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features that are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 31-41 Report List

5 6

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report. Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Advanced Dimensioning. Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 31-42 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

306
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Save The Measurements


9 10

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS. The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

File name = Advanced Dimensioning. Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 31-43 Save As

307
Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning


Objective - The instructor will present how the scanning functions of CAM2 Measure X can be used to obtain geometric and non-geometric curves. After this section, the student will be able to collect data for use in CAM2 Measure X and other CAD systems.

What is Scanning?
Scanning data can be saved as points, polylines, or splines. Data will typically be saved as , which are easier to work with than points or splines. Scanned data is always uncompensated, which means the data is always taken at the center of the SMR. To compensate for the probe radius, create a surface and then that surface by the radius.

Why Scan?
Scanning is generally useful if the part is not comprised of basic geometric (or prismatic) features. The general intent behind scanning is to generate curves that will eventually be used to create surfaces.

Scanning Options
The scanning option used depends upon the shape of the part being measured. Certain geometric shapes lend themselves to parallel cross sections; others lend themselves more to radial or normal lock planes.

Parallel

Cylindrical
FIGURE 32-1 Scanning Techniques

Normal

309
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Freehand Scan
Use the Freehand scan to trace a profile. CAM2 Measure X allows you to set the distance between the points.As the SMR passes through the minimum distance, it grabs the next point.

Lock Planes
The Lock Plane options is used to data onto predefined cross sections. CAM2 Measure X allows Locked Planes that are parallel to a plane, radial about a specified axis, or normal to a polyline. Parallel Lock Planes: Select the plane from which the cross sections are parallel, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), the distance between the planes, and the minimum distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum distance is achieved. Radial Lock Planes: Select a line from which the cross section planes will emanate, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), and the minimum distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum distance is achieved. Normal Lock Planes: Select a polyline. The planes are automatically generated at the points along the polyline.

Editing Scan data


Editing the scan data is a little different than editing 2D and 3D features. Since scan data is not a feature, you can not use the EDIT button in the REVIEW FEATURES command. CAM2 Measure X has specific ADD and REMOVE POINTS commands for data created with the commands in the SCAN menu. Use the EDIT < DELETE command to completely remove scan data.

Important Topics - Introduction to Scanning


To use the Normal Locked Plane command, a polyline must be selected. The polyline is typically created using the Freehand Scan. The Add or Remove Points command works with Polylines. The commands do not work with data saved as points or splines. Use the Edit > Delete command to delete points, polylines or splines. 310
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical


Practical Exercise
Using the assembled demo part, align to the part, and practice the scanning skills. Work in either inches or millimeters. NOTE: The steps in this practical are written to use Millimeters as the Drawing Unit. If you wish to complete the practical in Inches, remember to convert any number that you are typing into a dialog box. Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be the XY plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin, respectively.

S1

S2

FIGURE 33-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

311
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1 2


From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 33-2 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 33-3 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 33-4 Probes

312
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 3


From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 33-5 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 33-6 Plane Results

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 0.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 33-7 Probes

313
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6 7


From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 33-8 Select Plane

Measure the line.

Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 33-9 Measure Line 1

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 33-10 Line Results

314
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Continue with the command and measure a line.

Take the three or four points on the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

S1

S2

FIGURE 33-11 Measure Line 2

11

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE002. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 33-12 Line Results

Now that you have enough features to define a coordinate system, construct a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system.

315
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001. Select a Line = M_LINE002. Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 33-13 Line/Line coordinate system

13

Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part
1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = None. Click OK to create the Alignment.
FIGURE 33-14 CAD=Part Alignment

Click OK to accept the alignment.

Save the Measurements


3

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

The SAVE AS dialog box appears. File name = Scanning. Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce). Click SAVE.
FIGURE 33-15 Save As

316
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Scan Measurement Preference


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 33-16 Probes

2 3

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. Select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger. Maximum Distance = 100000000000. Minimum Distance = 2.0.

FIGURE 33-17 Feature Scanning

Click OK.

317
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Freehand Scanning (2D)


1

From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN > FREEHAND.

Type = 2D Freehand. Chordal = unchecked. Minimum Distance = 2.0. Save As = Open Polylines. Click OK.
FIGURE 33-18 Freehand Scan

The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 30. Click OK.
FIGURE 33-19 Select Plane

NOTE: The offset of 30 mm will create a plane parallel to the YZ plane at X = 30 mm. This will be at the edge of the curved surface. 3

Place the SMR on the upper part of the surface. Press the INSERT key to begin scanning. Move the SMR across the surface contour. Press the INSERT key to pause the scan. Press the HOME key to end the scan.

S1

S2

FIGURE 33-20 Measure the freehand scan

318
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Save the scan data.

To keep the scan data, press the INSERT key. To discard the scan data, press the HOME key.
FIGURE 33-21 Keep Data?

FIGURE 33-22 Freehand Scan

Parallel Lock Planes


1

From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK PLANES. Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in). Number of Planes = 100. Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in). Save As = Open Polylines. Click OK.
FIGURE 33-23 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

319
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 33-24 Select Plane

Scan the surface. Press the INSERT key to begin scanning. Move the SMR across the surface contour. Press the INSERT key to pause the scan. Press the HOME key to end the scan.

S1

S2

FIGURE 33-25 Parallel Locked Scanning

Save the scan data.

To keep the scan data, press the INSERT key. To discard the scan data, press the HOME key.
FIGURE 33-26 Keep Data?

320
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 33-27 Parallel Locked Planes

321
Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation


Objective: The instructor will present how to use the Learn/ Execute modes of CAM2 Measure X to increase the inspection process of repeat part inspection. After completing this section the student will be able to create Learn/Execute programs to automate steps of the measurement process.

Learn Mode
The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to a measurement process. The LEARN mode stores measurements, constructions, dimensions, coordinate systems, measurement instructions and

The output of text and graphical reports can also be learned. Programs created in the LEARN mode can be run in EXECUTE mode. There are two ways to create a Learn file, measurement device connected) and measurement device connected). (with the (with no

Create Learn files for operators that may not be very familiar with CAM2 to the Learn file Measure X or the part. Adding allows the operators to read instructions before they measure each feature.

On-Line Learn
On-Line Learn is like a video camera recording all of the activities. Once a feature is measured, add measurement instructions, nominals, tolerances, etc. in the RESULTS dialog box.

323
Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Off-Line Learn
Off-Line Learn creates a program by selecting features from the available menus for storage in the Learn file. A measurement device does not need to be connected; the only requirement is nominal information. Off-Line Learn is useful for creating measurement routines when the part is not available because the part does not need to be measured to make the program. The Off-Line mode can also be used to edit the programs.

Execute Mode
The EXECUTE mode allows the operator (or end user) to run the preprogrammed routines created in LEARN mode. If operators are only going to run EXECUTE mode, they only require minimal training.

Important Topics - Measurement Automation


There are two ways to create Learn Files: On-Line or Off-line. Every Learn command has a Comment parameter which stores the measurement instructions for the operator (or end user).

324
Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical


Practical Exercise
Create a part program, on-line, using CAD data for nominals. Use a CAD file for nominal information, measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the Learn file, and run the Learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 35-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 35-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

325
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 35-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 35-4 Adding CAD Parts

326
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 35-5 FARO_Demo_Part4 CAD file

Start Learning
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/ EXECUTE. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln). Click OK.
FIGURE 35-6 Choose File type

327
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the program currently contains.

FIGURE 35-7 Off-Line Programing Dialog

5 6

Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window. This will begin the On-Line Learn programing. CAM2 Measure X will switch back to the graphics view. The Learn toolbar automatically appears on the screen. It has with three buttons: LEARN VIEW, SAVE LEARN, and STOP ON-LINE LEARN. LEARN VIEW records the current view in the program.

SAVE LEARN opens the SAVE LEARN dialog box.

STOP ON-LINE LEARN returns CAM2 Measure X to the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This allows you to save the program, make off-line changes, end the Learn Process, or resume On-Line Learning.
FIGURE 35-8 Learn Toolbar

328
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measure Alignment/Datum Features


Measure 4 circles in the bolt pattern for an Iterative/Best Fit Alignment. Measure the circles at the 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern. 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 35-9 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure a plane on the top surface of the part. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 35-10 Measure XY Plane

329
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Click the NOTES tab.

Feature Notes: Use this to enter information about a feature for the Report. NOTE: The Learn file will not store this information.

Measurement Instructions: Use this to give instructions, or comments, to the operator as the Learn program is Executed. Highlight: This will highlight the selected nominal red when the Learn program is Executed.
FIGURE 35-11 Plane Results

Enter some measurement instructions for the operator.

FIGURE 35-12 Enter Measurement Instructions for the Operator

330
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click the HIGHLIGHT button.

Click the FROM SCREEN button. Select the CAD surface that is to be measured. Click OK to accept the results of the nominal surface. Right mouse click to return to the Highlight dialog box. Click OK to accept the highlight.
FIGURE 35-13 Highlight the CAD Surface

7 8

Click OK to accept the plane. From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 35-14 Probes

9 10

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 35-15 Select Plane

331
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Measure Circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-16 Measure Circle 1

12

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 35-17 Circle Results

13

Click on the NOTES tab.

Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 1.

FIGURE 35-18 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 1

332
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 14 15


Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click the FROM SCREEN button.

Using the left mouse button select Circle 1 on the CAD Model. Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-19 Circle 1

16

Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = unchecked. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-20 Set Tolerances

17 18

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. Click OK to accept the circle.

NOTE: Remember that CAM2 Measure X will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled.

333
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 19

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-21 Measure Circle 3

20

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 35-22 Circle Results

21

Click on the NOTES tab.

Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 3.

FIGURE 35-23 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 3

334
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 22 23


Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click the FROM SCREEN button.

Using the left mouse button select Circle 3 on the CAD Model. Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-24 Circle 3

24 25

Click OK to accept the circle. Measure Circle 5.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-25 Measure Circle 5

26

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 35-26 Circle Results

335
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 27

Click on the NOTES tab.

Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 5.

FIGURE 35-27 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 5

28 29

Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click the FROM SCREEN button.

Using the left mouse button select Circle 5 on the CAD Model. Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-28 Circle 5

30 31

Click OK to accept the circle. Measure Circle 7.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-29 Measure Circle 7

336
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 32

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 35-30 Circle Results

33

Click on the NOTES tab.

Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 7.

FIGURE 35-31 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 7

34 35

Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click the FROM SCREEN button.

Using the left mouse button select Circle 7 on the CAD Model. Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-32 Circle 7

36

Click OK to accept the circle. 337


Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating an Alignment
1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I. Set Weights = unchecked. Scale Option = NONE. Click OK to create the Alignment.

FIGURE 35-33 Iterative Alignment

Click OK to accept alignment.

Constructions and Dimensions


Construct the Bolt Circle and check it to the CAD Model. 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001, N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005, N_CIRCLE007. Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001. Select NOMINAL radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 35-34 Construct Nominal Circle

338
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Take a look at the results.

Label = BOLT_CIRCLE. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 35-35 Circle Results

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed from the CAD circles. This will be the nominal for the part's Bolt Circle. NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these feature types. 3

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Select CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 35-36 Construct Best Fit Circle

339
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Click on the NOMINAL tab.

Select Nominal = N_BOLT_CIRCLE. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 35-37 Bolt Circle Results

Since this is a construction, in Execute CAM2 Measure X will complete this command automatically. No measurement instructions are required. Check the angle of the circles in the pattern. They should be an evenly spaced 90 pattern around the center circle. 5

From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I. Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I. Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE. Click OK.
FIGURE 35-38 Dimension Angle Apex

6 7

Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click the KEY-IN button:

Angle = 90. Choose the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK.


FIGURE 35-39 Dimension Angle Nominal

8 9

Click OK to accept the nominal. Click OK to accept the dimension. 340

Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Generating a Report
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Online Learn Execute. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 35-40 Enter Header Information

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features that are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 35-41 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular. 341
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6


The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report. Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Online Learn Execute. Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 35-42 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

End Learn.
1

Click the STOP ON-LINE LEARN button. The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears and the on-line programming stops.

FIGURE 35-43 Off-Line Learn/Execute

342
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

Creator = your name. Part Name = Online Learn Execute. Drawing Revision Number = A. Click SAVE.

FIGURE 35-44 Saving the Learn/Execute

From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

Execute Mode
Run the program. 1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln). Click OK.
FIGURE 35-45 Choose File type

343
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The LEARN/EXECUTE window shows the list of programs.

Select ONLINE LEARN EXECUTE. Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 35-46 Execute Only

5 6 7

Run through the measurements. Constructions and Dimensions are executed automatically. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Online Learn Execute. Serial Number of the current part = 0002. Click OK.

FIGURE 35-47 Enter Header Information

Repeat Execute?

Press the HOME key to exit

FIGURE 35-48 Repeat the Program?

344
Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical


Practical Exercise
Create a part program, off-line, using a drawing for nominals. Measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the learn file, and run the learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 36-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 36-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK.

345
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Start Learning
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/EXECUTE. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln). Click OK.
FIGURE 36-3 Choose File type

The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the program currently contains.

FIGURE 36-4 Off-Line Programing Dialog

Add Alignment/Datum Features


Construct a coordinate system based upon the datums, then measure the circles at 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern.

346
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES > SET CURRENT PROBE.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 36-5 Probes

2 3 4

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Click on the MEASURE PLANE command (line 10). Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a plane. NOTE: This is the same as adding Measurement Instructions in On-Line learn. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-6 Enter a Comment for the Operator

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-7 Change number of points for the feature

Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 11). All new commands are always added above the selected line. 347
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES > SET CURRENT PROBE.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 36-8 Probes

8 9

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE > 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-9 Select Plane

10 11

Click on the MEASURE LINE 2D command (line 13). Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a line. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-10 Enter a Comment for the Operator

348
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-11 Change number of points for the feature

13 14 15

Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 14). From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-12 Select Plane

16 17

Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 14). Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a circle. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-13 Enter a Comment for the Operator

349
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 18

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-14 Change number of points for the feature

19

Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen. Label = CIRCLE009.

20 21 22

Click on the NOMINALS button. Click on the KEY IN button.

Enter the Nominal information of circle 9.

X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 100.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 36-15 Construct Circle Enter Values

23

Click OK to accept the nominal.

350
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 24

Click on the TOLERANCES button.

X= unchecked. Y = unchecked. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked 0.25, -0.10. MMC = unchecked. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 36-16 Results Tolerance Tab

25 26

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. Click OK to accept the tolerances.

351
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Adding an Alignment
1 2

Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 16). From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 3-2-1.

Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009. Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-17 3-2-1 Coordinate System

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = NONE. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-18 CAD=Part Alignment

352
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measuring Features
1 2 3

Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 18). From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-19 Select Plane

4 5

Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 18). Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-20 Enter a Comment for the Operator

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-21 Change number of points for the feature

353
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen. Label = CIRCLE001.

8 9 10

Click on the NOMINALS button. Click on the KEY IN button.

Enter the Nominal information of circle 1.

X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 36-22 Construct Circle Enter Values

11

Click OK to accept the nominal.

354
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

Click on the TOLERANCES button.

X= unchecked. Y = unchecked. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.00. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 36-23 Results Tolerance Tab

13 14 15 16 17

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. Click OK to accept the tolerances. Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 20). From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-24 Select Plane

18

Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 20).

355
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 19

Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-25 Enter a Comment for the Operator

20

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-26 Change number of points for the feature

21

Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen. Label = CIRCLE003.

22 23

Click on the NOMINALS button. Click on the KEY IN button.

356
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 24

Enter the Nominal information of circle 3.

X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 36-27 Construct Circle Enter Values

25 26 27 28

Click OK to accept the nominal. Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 22). From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-28 Select Plane

29

Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 22).

357
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 30

Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-29 Enter a Comment for the Operator

31

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-30 Change number of points for the feature

32

Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen. Label = CIRCLE005.

33 34

Click on the NOMINALS button. Click on the KEY IN button.

358
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 35

Enter the Nominal information of circle 5.

X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 36-31 Construct Circle Enter Values

36 37 38 39

Click OK to accept the nominal. Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 24). From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-32 Select Plane

40

Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 24).

359
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 41

Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter. Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle. Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-33 Enter a Comment for the Operator

42

Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

Feature = 4. Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-34 Change number of points for the feature

43

Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen. Label = CIRCLE007.

44 45

Click on the NOMINALS button. Click on the KEY IN button.

360
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 46

Enter the Nominal information of circle 7.

X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 36-35 Construct Circle Enter Values

47

Click OK to accept the nominal.

Adding Constructions and Dimensions


1 2

Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 26). From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT. Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE005, M_CIRCLE007. Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. Select CONSTRUCTED radio button. Click OK.

FIGURE 36-36 Construct Best Fit Circle

Click on the CONSTRUCT CIRCLE BEST FIT command (line 26).

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these feature types.

361
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen. Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 6 7

Click on the NOMINALS button. Click on the KEY IN button.

Enter the Nominal information for the bolt circle.

X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 140.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 36-37 Construct Circle Enter Values

8 9

Click OK to accept the nominal. Click on the TOLERANCES button.

X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = unchecked. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 36-38 Results Tolerance Tab

362
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10 11 12


Click OK to accept the tolerances. Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 28). From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003. Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001. Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-39 Dimension Angle Apex

13 14 15 16

Click on the DIMENSION ANGLE APEX command (line 28). Click on the NOMINALS button. Click the KEY-IN button.

Enter the following value:

Angle = 90. Choose the NOMINAL radio button. Click OK.


FIGURE 36-40 Dimension Angle Nominal

17 18

Click OK to accept the nominal. Click OK to accept the dimension.

Generating a Report
1 2

Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 30). From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > TEXT REPORT.

363
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header. Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked. Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features that are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 36-41 Report List

4 5

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report. Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Offline Learn Execute. Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 36-42 Save Report

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

364
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

End Learn

FIGURE 36-43 Off-Line Learn/Execute

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

Creator = your name. Part Name = Offline Learn Execute. Drawing Revision Number = A. Click SAVE.

FIGURE 36-44 Saving the Learn/Execute

From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

365
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Execute Mode
Run the program. 1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln). Click OK.


FIGURE 36-45 Choose File type

Select OFFLINE LEARN EXECUTE. Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 36-46 Execute Only

4 5

Run through the measurements. Measure a plane on the top surface of the part. Take four points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-47 Measure XY Plane

366
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Measure line 1. Take four points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-48 Measure X Axis

Measure circle 9.

Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-49 Measure Circle 9

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the coordinate system and alignment. 8

Measure Circle 1.

Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-50 Measure Circle 1

367
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

Measure Circle 3.

Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-51 Measure Circle 3

10

Measure Circle 5.

Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-52 Measure Circle 5

11

Measure Circle 7.

Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-53 Measure Circle 7

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the bolt circle and angle dimension.

368
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 12

Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Offline Learn Execute. Serial Number of the current part = 0002. Click OK.

FIGURE 36-54 Enter Header Information

13

Repeat Execute?

Press the HOME key to exit

FIGURE 36-55 Repeat the Program?

369
Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measurement Automation


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to create a SoftCheck Tool. After completing this section, the student will apply the previous lessons and create a SoftCheck Tool for other ControlStation operators.

Learn Mode
The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to a measurement process. Some of the information stored in a learn command, such as nominals and tolerances, will be familiar. Commands such as target points, highlighted features, and comments are only available in Learn/Execute mode. These are the visual aids to help the operator measure a part. Target Points: CAM2 Measure X records the position of the probe for each digitized point as features are measured. The operator will see each point to digitize in the CAD view. Highlighted Features: Nominal features may be turned a different color in the CAD view to help the operator determine the correct feature to measure. All nominals assigned to a measured feature will be highlighted automatically.

NOTE: CAD view is not seen when running a SoftCheck Tool. Comments: The operator receives instructions in a text window before measuring a feature. This is a good command to use to explain important details about the part.

SoftCheck tools have a comment for each digitized point, including the compensation point. The comment is a combination of a picture or video, and text.

371
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Online or Offline?
There are different approaches to creating a measurement routine. Some information is easier to create in Online mode, and other information is easier to create in Offline mode.The table below shows which commands are easier in Online and Offline mode. Online Target Points Measure Template command Auto Nominal Association (with CAD) Setting Views Alignments Offline Comments Adding Nominals (without CAD) Setting Tolerances Changing Feature Label Names Copy and Pasting groups of commands Selecting similar commands for editing as a group

Execute Mode
The EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run the finished program. If the operator makes a mistake while measuring and cancels the command, the Learn/Execute program will prompt the operator with the Fail Mode setting in the program: Re-measure or Re-start (default): This option will re-measure the last feature, quit, or re-start the program. Re-start with Notification: This option will quit or re-start the program. Re-start or Backup: This option allows the operator to back up to a previous command in the program, quit, or re-start the program.

Display Results
After each measurement or construction, the results are displayed. The Learn Execute mode of CAM2 Measure has the ability to display the results (On), never display the results (Off), or only display the results when a feature is out of tolerance (Only Out of Tolerance). Each Feature in the program has a DISPLAY OPTIONS parameter.

372
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Measurement Automation


Learn files may be created in Online or Offline mode. Offline mode is used to edit a Learn/Execute file. Comments may be used to input user instructions There are three fail mode options: Re-measure or Re-start, Re-start with Notification, and Re-start or Backup.

373
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical


Practical Exercise
5 4 3 2 1

65 [2.56]
D

20 [.787] 167 [6.575]

.50

.50 B
130 [5.118]

B
50 [1.969] 15 [.591] 25 [.984] 25 [.984] 15 [.591] 30 50 [1.181] 65 [1.969] [2.559] 160 [6.299] 4X 170 [6.693] 50 [1.969] .50 C 5 [.197] 20 [.787] 15 [.591]

50 [1.969] 65 [2.559] 15 [.591]

20 [.787]

20 [.787]

265 [10.433]

B
240 [9.449] 300 [11.811]

255 [10.04]

150 [5.906]

C
60 [2.362] 30 [1.181] 15
A

100 50 [3.94] .50 A [1.969]

40 [1.575] 15 15 [.591] [.591] EQ. SP. ON A 20 [0.798] +0.25 140 [5.512] BC -0.10
1.0 M A B C

15 [.591] 30 [1.181]

8X

.50

25 [.984]

SECTION B-B
03FRM049-REV 1

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. 4 3

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.01 1
THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

63 FINSH REQUIRED

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

Armed with Quality

TITLE

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE


2 1

Selecting Units and Default Tolerances


1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-1 Drawing Units

375
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3 4


From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 38-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/ EXECUTE. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct). Click OK.
FIGURE 38-3 Choose File type

376
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

CAM2 Measure is now in OFFLINE mode.

FIGURE 38-4 Offline Learn

Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button.

Measure the Datum Features


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-5 Probes

377
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2 3


From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE. Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-6 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_A. Datum = A.

FIGURE 38-7 Results

Click OK to accept the plane.

378
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-8 Probes

7 8

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 38-9 Select Plane

Measure Datum B as a line. Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-10 Measure X Axis

379
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_B. Datum = B.

FIGURE 38-11 Line Results

11 12

Click OK to accept the line. From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES. SMR = 0.5 Inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-12 Probes

13 14

From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER. Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 38-13 Measure Cylinder 9

380
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 15

Take a look at the results.

Label = DATUM_C. Datum = C.

FIGURE 38-14 Cylinder Results

16

Click OK to accept the cylinder.

Constructing the Measured Alignment


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A. Select a Line = M_DATUM_C. Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-15 Construct Point Line/Feature

2 3

Click OK to accept the results. From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-

381
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2-1. Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = C_POINT001. Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 38-16 3-2-1 Coordinate System

4 5

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Scale Option = NONE. Click OK.
FIGURE 38-17 CAD=Part Alignment

Form Dimensions
An alignment between the measured features and the nominal features has

382
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 been completed, continue with the GD&T form dimensions. 1

From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

Tolerance = 0.50. Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-18 Flatness

2 3

Click OK to accept the flatness. From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

Tolerance = 0.50. Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-19 Straightness

Click OK to accept the straightness.

383
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

Tolerance = 0.50. Datum = A. Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C. Click OK.


FIGURE 38-20 Perpendicularity

Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore has not been measured, however; it is possible to measure inside a GD&T command. 7

From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

Tolerance = 0.50. Datum = C. Select a Feature = Measure as Cylinder. Click OK.


FIGURE 38-21 Concentricity

Measure the cylinder 10.

Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 38-22 Measure Cylinder10

384
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

Take a look at the results.

Label = CYLINDER010.

FIGURE 38-23 Cylinder Results

10 11

Click OK to accept the cylinder. Click OK to accept the concentricity.

Position Dimensions
After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the following hole location data may be determined:
X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 Circle 3 Circle 5 Circle 7

0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm -70.00 mm

70.00 mm 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm

0.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm

20.00 mm 20.00 mm 20.00 mm 20.00 mm

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part.

385
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-24 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed. Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 38-25 Select Plane

386
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Measure Circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 38-26 Measure Circle 1

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 38-27 Circle Results

Click on the NOMINALS tab in the top of the RESULTS box.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-28 Results Nominal Tab

387
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Enter the nominal information.

X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 38-29 Construct Circle Enter Values

Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

X = unchecked. Y = unchecked. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = unchecked. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 38-30 Set Tolerances

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the tolerance information for the next circle.

388
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured and nominal.

FIGURE 38-31 Tabular Results

11

Click OK to accept the circle.

Measure will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled. 12

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-32 Measure Circle 3

389
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 38-33 Circle Results

14

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-34 Results Nominal Tab

15

Enter the nominal information.

X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 38-35 Construct Circle Enter Values

390
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 16 17


Click OK to accept the circle. Measure Circle 5.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-36 Measure Circle 5

18

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 38-37 Circle Results

19

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-38 Results Nominal Tab

391
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 20

Enter the nominal information.

X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 38-39 Construct Circle Enter Values

21 22

Click OK to accept the circle. Measure Circle 7.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-40 Measure Circle 7

23

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 38-41 Circle Results

392
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 24

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-42 Results Nominal Tab

25

Enter the nominal information.

X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK. Click OK to accept the results.
FIGURE 38-43 Construct Circle Enter Values

26

Click OK to accept the circle.

393
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Bolt Circle
1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT. Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001, N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005, N_CIRCLE007. Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001. Select NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-44 Construct Nominal Circle

Take a look at the results.

Label = BOLT_CIRCLE. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 38-45 Circle Results

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed using the CAD circles. This will be our nominal for the measured Bolt Circle.

394
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT. Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I. Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-46 Construct Best Fit Circle

Click on the NOMINALS tab.

Select Nominal = N_BOLT_CIRCLE.

FIGURE 38-47 Bolt Circle Results

395
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = 0.25. Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = 0.25. Z = unchecked. Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10. MMC = unchecked. Form = unchecked. RMS = unchecked. Std Dev = unchecked. RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 38-48 Set Tolerances

Click OK to accept the circle.

Position Dimensions
1

From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

MMC = 1.0. Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE001_I. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-49 Position

396
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Click on the TOLERANCE tab.

MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.0. RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 38-50 Position Tolerances

3 4 5

Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will update the position tolerances for this file and all the future position commands. Click OK to accept the position. From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

MMC = 1.0. Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE003_I. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-51 Position

6 7

Click OK to accept the position. From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

MMC = 1.0. Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE005_I. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-52 Position

Click OK to accept the position.

397
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

MMC = 1.0. Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE007_I. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-53 Position

10

Click OK to accept the position.

Printing a Report
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the PRINT button. Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Base Plate Training. Serial Number of the current part = 0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-54 Enter Header Information

398
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

Header = Header Format = Tabular. Picture = checked. Notes = unchecked. Auto Arrange Labels = checked Calibration Error = unchecked. Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*. All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature. Click OK.
FIGURE 38-55 Report List

5 6

The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report. Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

Filename = Base Plate Training. Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht). Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 38-56 Save Report

7 8

Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

399
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Modifying and Saving Your Learn file


1

Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button. This places you back in the LEARN/EXECUTE window and ends the programming.

FIGURE 38-57 Offline Learn/Execute

Left mouse click on the PRINT GRAPHICAL TEXT command. You may have to scroll down the window on left side of the screen to see this command. It should be the second from the bottom of the list. Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dialog. Allow user to change all user fields = checked. Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked. Allow the operator to modify the serial number = checked. Auto Increment Serial number = checked. Serial Number template = checked, SN####. Click OK.
FIGURE 38-58 Serial Number Template

400
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Double left mouse click on the MODE Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dialog. Mode = Automatic.

FIGURE 38-59 Save Mode

Double left mouse click on the PREVIEW Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dialog. Preview = On.

FIGURE 38-60 Preview

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

Creator = Your Name. Part Name = Base Plate Training. Drawing Revision Number = A. Click SAVE.

FIGURE 38-61 Saving the Learn/Execute

From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

401
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Execute Mode
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type that you are running.

Learn/Execute files = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct). Click OK.


FIGURE 38-62 Choose File type

From the LIST window, select Base Plate Training.

FIGURE 38-63 Select the Basic Measurements Program

5 6 7

Click the EXECUTE button. Run through all the measurements. Constructions and dimensions are executed automatically.

402
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

At the end of program, enter the operator and serial number.

Operators Name: = Your Name. Name of the Part = Base Plate Training. Serial Number of the current part = SN0001. Click OK.

FIGURE 38-64 Enter Header Information

9 10 11

Click OK in REPORT PREVIEW. Click NO in SAVE CHANGES. Click CANCEL in LEARN FILES.

403
Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to use digital pictures and a CAM2 Measure Learn Execute program to create a SoftCheck Tool. After completing this section the student will be able to create a SoftCheck Tool.

SoftCheck Tools
SoftCheck Tool is the term for enhanced Learn/Execute programs. A typical Learn/Execute program takes an operator through the steps of a part program with instruction text prompts and CAD drawings. A SoftCheck Tool incorporates digital pictures of the part and color-coded targets to make the more user friendly. Digital video (AVI) and digital audio (WAV) can also be used in a SoftCheck Tool.

Taking Pictures
Take pictures to show an operator exactly where to take the measurements. Take close-up shots of areas where detail is needed. Orient the camera in the same way that the operator will be looking at the part. While taking pictures, include as many features in a shot without sacrificing . Capturing a big cluster of features from space, picture clarity, and far away will not provide enough detailed information for the operator. One picture can be used as many times as needed. The ideal image size is 640x480 pixels, most cameras have an adjustable setting for the size of a picture. One picture of the entire part must be taken to use as an Tool Manager. in SoftCheck

405
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Image Creator
Each point during the execution of a program will require its own picture and target point. The picture must have a specific name and for the software to properly associate it with its corresponding measurement. FAROs Image Creator program makes the photo editing process faster and easier.

The Green Ball


A standard FARO SoftCheck Tool uses the image of a green sphere as a target. The color indicates that the SMR must make contact with the surface and the INSERT key must be pressed. A where the HOME key must be pressed. sphere indicates

An image library will automatically load with Image Creator. The target balls will be dragged from the image library to the digital picture. There is a complete green ball, red ball, 24 partial balls, and a shadow in the image library. 3D Effects The is used to give some depth to the red ball or compensation point. The shadow demonstrates that the ball is floating above a surface.

Independent Comments
Independent comments in the program can have pictures. The OFFLINE EDIT mode will prompt for the name of the picture file. A comment at the beginning of each program to instruct the operator to follow the green ball and press the correct button will help the operator understand the concept of the green and red sphere. AVI and WAV files can be used in comments.

406
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hot Keys for Image Creator


Keystroke Function Help Delete Enlarge Shrink Previous Frame Next Frame Rotate Counter-Clockwise Rotate Clockwise Select

D N C+W C+X A+W A+X S


Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures


A picture that shows the entire part should be taken for use as the icon in SoftCheck Tool Manager. Take several close up pictures of the part that shows the features that are to be measured. This will help the operator to understand which features is to be measured. Icons must be created to use the Pack Tool command. The Pack Tool command is designed to create a single file to transport the SoftCheck Tool to another computer.

407
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical
Practical Exercise
Taking and Importing Images
1 2

Use the Digital Camera to take pictures of the part. From the START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS < FARO < IMAGE CREATOR.

NOTE: The CAM2 Measure portlock must be enabled for SoftCheck Tools to use Image Creator. NOTE: A part program must be created to use Image Creator. Copy the jpg files to the CAM2 MEASURE\LEARN\(PART NAME)\BASE IMAGES directory. 3

Select the BASE PLATE TRAINING.

Click OPEN.

FIGURE 40-1 Open file

Image Creator will prompt for the first base image. 4 5


Click the IMPORT button. Navigate to the removable drive that contains the images.

409
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Select the images.

Click OPEN.

FIGURE 40-2 Open Images

Select an image.

Click SELECT.

FIGURE 40-3 Select Image

The first measured feature on your program appears in the Tree View. The Point Number field is automatically set to Point 1.

FIGURE 40-4 Image Creator

Adding the Green/Red Balls


1 2

From the EDIT menu, select MOVE MODE. This allows the green/red balls to be dragged from the image library to the base image. Click and drag the green target ball from the image library to the base image.

410
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Re-size the green ball. From the LAYER menu, select ENLARGE. The ENLARGE command will increase the size of the ball. From the LAYER menu, select SHRINK. The SHRINK command will reduce the size of the ball.

From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

NOTE: The NEXT button saves the location and size of the ball for the point. The image will get created with the SAVE JPGS command. 5 6 7 8 9 10

Move the ball to the next target location. From the FRAME menu, select NEXT. Repeat for all points. When you get to the compensation point, the green ball will automatically turn into the red ball with a shadow. Click and drag the image into position. Rotate the image. From the EDIT menu, select ROTATE MODE. The ROTATE command will spin the ball. Click and hold the left mouse button on the base image. Scroll left to right to rotate the ball.

11 12 13

From the FRAME menu, select NEXT. Repeat this section for all measured features. Change the base image. From the FRAME menu, select CHANGE BASE IMAGE.

NOTE: The partial balls are used to give the three-dimensional illusion that the ball is behind an object. To indicate that a point should be taken inside or behind a feature, select the partial ball that best fits the situation. NOTE: You are encouraged to do the pictures in the same order as the features in the program. This way, you take advantage of the auto increment feature in Image Creator.

411
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating Images, Icons and Reports


To run your programs in the SoftCheck Tool Manager, you need to make a couple of icons or buttons to start the program. Ideally, you will use one picture of the part to create these icons. 1 2 3

From the SCT menu, select SAVE JPEGS. From the SCT menu, select SCTM ICONS. Click the SET button for the BIG image.

Select the Base Image. Click SELECT.

FIGURE 40-5 SCTM Icons

4 5 6

Click OK. From the SCT menu, select REPORT IMAGE. Click the SET button.

Select the Base Image. Click SELECT.

FIGURE 40-6 Report Icons

Click OK.

Saving the Image List


1

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

This saves the image list as an Image Creator file (*.icp). 2

From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

412
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure


You can also view the pictures without having to run the program. 1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/ EXECUTE. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct). Click OK.


FIGURE 40-7 Choose File type

From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

Click NO to save changes. Select Base Plate Training. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 40-8 Open SoftCheck Tool

Highlight the MEASURE PLANE command.

413
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PREVIEW COMMENTS.

PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN will cycle through the program by command. UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW will cycle through the program by point. The text comments can be edited while previewing the pictures.
FIGURE 40-9 Preview Comments

7 8 9

From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN. Click YES to save changes. If picutres need to be modified, use Image Creator, then return to CAM2 Measure to preview the comments.

Execute the SoftCheck Tool


1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct). Click OK.


FIGURE 40-10 Choose File type

Click NO to save changes.

414
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

Select the program.

Select Base Plate Training. Click EXECUTE.

FIGURE 40-11 Execute SoftCheck Tool

Run through all the measurements.

415
Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FAROs Image Creator Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the capabilities of SoftCheck Tool Manager Program. After completing this section, the student will be able to set up Part and Operator preferences and navigate through SoftCheck Tool Manager.

Using the SoftCheck Tool Manager


The SoftCheck Tool Manager (SCTM) is an HTML-based program that serves as a for SCTs (SoftCheck Tools). SoftCheck Tool Manager has the look and feel of a web site with large buttons to navigate through the different options. The SoftCheck Tool Manager can be installed on the computer by selecting the CUSTOM install from the CAM2 Measure installation CD.

Navigating the SCTM


Main Screen The Control Station touch screen computer opens to the main SCTM screen. Administrator: This area is designated for the person responsible for managing the Control Station. New Operator: New operators are prompted to select their assigned User ID and enter their personal password twice for verification to begin working for the first time. Once a password is entered, the operator can go directly to OPERATOR LOGIN screen. Operator Login: Operators are prompted to select their User ID and enter the password to begin working. Tool List: The large, green ball in the center of the screen takes the operator straight to the public SCT library. Log Off Operator: Logs off the current operator. CAM2 Measure: Launch CAM2 Measure. System Off: Shuts down the Control Station. 417
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 NOTE: If there is no administrator account set on the Control Station, all SCTs are considered public and all areas are available to anyone. An administrator has the rights to set operator accounts and assign or restrict their use of SCTs. Tool List In the Tool List you have series of picture icons/buttons that represent your SCTs. The NAMES button changes the large buttons to small buttons and full program names. To return to the large button screen touch the PICTURES button. To start a program the picture.

TOOL KITS: The Tool Kits allow the operator to create programs using simple macros. The macros can be linked together to create a larger program. Administrator PREFERENCES, SHORTCUTS, TOOL MANAGEMENT, OPERATOR SETUP, DATA MANAGEMENT and BACKUP are found in the ADMINISTRATOR area. PREFERENCES: Set default values for System Options, Tool Options and Operator Options. SYSTEM OPTIONS: Change the look of the program by setting the default screens when the machine is turned on. This also eliminates the number of different screen options or tool list modes displayed for an operator. PATHS: You can view and modify the system paths for the Control Station.

SHORTCUTS: In this area are shortcuts to Windows Explorer, Windows Notepad, CAM2 SPC Graph and the SoftCheck Tool web site. TOOL MANAGEMENT: Manage the SoftCheck Tools on your Control Station. ADD FOLDER: Adds a folder to the SoftCheck Tool List. MOVE TO FOLDER: Moves the selected tool to a different folder. DELETE: Removes a SoftCheck Tool or folder from the computer.

418
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 LOAD TOOL: Adds a SoftCheck Tool from a removable drive (CD, 1.44 diskette, Microdrive) or browse the drives for a Packed Tool. DOWNLOAD FROM WEB: Link to FAROs Control Station website. PRINT TOOL LIST: Sends a file to the printer of a list of tools on the Control Station. SAVE TOOL LIST: Saves a file that has a list of tools on the Control Station. TOOL OPTIONS: Set access rights for SCTs by touching the underlined parameters. Archived Status: Current means that the program is available in the tool list. Archive removes the program form the tool list. (It can be made current at any time.) User ID Required: No makes the tool available to anyone. Yes requires an operator to be logged in to run the SCT. Serial Number Required: No does not prompt the operator to input a serial number. Yes requires an operator to input a serial number. Auto Serial Number: No does not auto increment serial numbers. Yes auto increments serial numbers.

OPERATOR SETUP: Add operators and access their tool privileges. OPERATOR NAMES: Add, delete, or modify operators. Assign user IDs, initalize or modify passwords. The RESET PASSWORD box allows users to enter their own password the first time they log in to the system. They will have to log in as new user. OPERATOR OPTIONS: Set the Default Tool List Mode for each operator. (Pictures, Names or System) TOOL ACCESS: Assign tools to a registered operator.

DATA MANAGEMENT: View, archive, import, export and delete reports. BACKUP: Backup and recover SoftCheck Tools and Data. PATH: Set the location of the backup file. BACKUP FREQUENCY: Set the time of day for automatic backup. 419
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 RESTORE FROM BACKUP: Restores the Control Station from the Backup file.

Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool Manager


SoftCheck Tool Manager is the player for SoftCheck Tools. SoftCheck Tools that are played through SoftCheck Tool Manager do not require a portlock.

NOTE: The first time a program is run on a new computer a password must be entered to authorize the computer to run without a portlock. The password can be obtained from FAROs customer service department. The report names are controlled by the serial number of the part. To enter a serial number for a part you must activate the SERIAL NUMBER REQUIRED or AUTO SERIAL NUMBER option in the TOOL MANAGEMENT > TOOL OPTIONS page. A SoftCheck Tool that does not have an icon will be displayed as a large green ball in the TOOL LIST.

420
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Transferring SCTs to a New Computer
To transfer files from the Control Station to another computer, the PACK TOOL command will be used. This is available in the OFFLINE mode of LEARN EXECUTE in the TOOL BUILDER menu. The PACK TOOL command compresses all the files for a SoftCheck Tool into one file. To transfer files from the programming computer: 1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/ EXECUTE. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct). Click OK.
FIGURE 42-1 Choose File type

From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

Click NO to save changes. Select Base Plate Training. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 42-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

421
Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6


From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PACK TOOL. Select the Image Files.

SCT File = checked. JPG Images = checked. Tool Settings File = unchecked. SCT Image Files = Select All. SCT Base Image Files = Select All. SPC Graph Files = Select All.
FIGURE 42-3 Pack Tool 1

7 8

Click NEXT. Select the Report Formats and Compression.

Report Format Files = No. Spanning = No.

FIGURE 42-4 Pack Tool 2

Click FINISH. Click OK.

FIGURE 42-5 Creating CAB file

NOTE: The Base Plate Training.cab file is created and stored in the DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\ALL USERS\APPLICATION DATA\FARO directory. 10 11 12

From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN. From the FILE menu, select EXIT. Click NO to save changes.

422
Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

SoftCheck Tool Setup


1

From START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS > FARO > SOFTCHECK TOOL MANAGER.

FIGURE 42-6 SoftCheck Tool Manager

Click on the ADMINISTRATOR button. Administrator name = Administrator name. Password Entry = password.

Click LOGIN.

FIGURE 42-7 Administrator

Click the TOOL MANAGEMENT button. 423


Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6


Click the TOOL OPTIONS button. Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING SoftCheck tool.

Archive Status = Current. Operator Required = Yes. Serial Number Required = No. Auto Serial Number = Yes.

FIGURE 42-8 Tool Options

Click on the AUTO SERIAL NUMBER link to modify the serial number option for BASE PLATE TRAINING.

Auto Serial Number = checked. Part Serial Number = SN####. Next Serial Number = 3. Next Part Serial = blank.

FIGURE 42-9 Auto Serial Number

Click OK.

424
Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 9

Click the TOOL LIST button.

FIGURE 42-10 Tool List

10 11

Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING button. Measure the part.

425
Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting


OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this section, the student will know how to interpret charts and set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC Graph to work together.

Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph


CAM2 SPC Graph requires two files to create a report. The picture or view file, the second is the measurement data. is the

NOTE: All data is exported to SPC GRAPH\(PART NAME) directory. The name of the Learn\Execute program is in a folder in the CAM2 SPC Graph directory.

Using Pictures from a Digital Camera


Digital pictures may be imported into CAM2 SPC Graph as an EMF or BMP. Most digital cameras store pictures in JPG (JPEG) format. Use an image the JPGs as EMF or BMP. Store the digital editing program to picture in the SPCGRAPH\(PART NAME) directory. TIP: Save the picture in the same orientation that the part will be measured.

Chart Types
RUN CHART - A Run Chart plots the actual values of a measured feature over time. It tracks long-term and patterns to assist in determining when intervention is needed in a process by revealing unusual patterns in measurement. RANGE CHART - A Range Chart calculates a value of a spread of numbers or data. The range is determined by subtracting the lowest number from the highest number in the group. The range variations are plotted over time. This shows the variations of a range of measurements in the process.

427
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 AVERAGE CHART - An Average Chart calculates the mean (average) of a group of numbers. The mean values are plotted over . This shows the variations of an average of measurements in the process. CAM2 SPC Graph plots the nominal data, the measurement average, and the upper and lower control limits, which are automatically calculated based on the data. The Cp and the Cpk ratio is calculated and displayed on the bottom of the chart. GROUP SIZE - The CHART, # IN EACH GROUP field specifies the number of measurements to merge. Each point on the Average Chart equals the average of the values in each group. Each group is organized sequentially by date.

Advanced Chart Options


PROCESS CAPABILITY INDICES (Cp & Cpk) - At the bottom of the Preview window is the Process Capability (Cp) ratio. This compares the actual variation of the process with the requirements. It measures the precision and performance of the process, but not necessarily the accuracy. A Cp ratio of less than means that the process is not capable of meeting specifications because the variation is higher than the requirements. While the Cp measures precision, it only indicates the potential of the process to meet the requirements. The Cpk ratio, also at the bottom of the PREVIEW window, measures accuracy and . The Cpk ratio takes into consideration the process variation, and how close it is to nominal. It is advantageous to refer not only to the Cp, but also to the Cpk ratio. Every process is subject to classification based on capability and control. The four general cases that we may use to classify a process are illustrated in the following charts:
Case 1
+Tol Nominal -Tol Average Process Variation +Tol Nominal -Tol

Case 2
Average Process Variation

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk>1) Meeting Requirements = "Acceptable"

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk<1) Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

Case 3
+Tol Nominal -Tol -Tol Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1) Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable" Average +Tol Process Variation Nominal

Case 4

Average

Process Variation

Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1) Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

428
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Case 1 represents a desirable scenario because the process is in control, meaning that it has variation within the established tolerance and the average measurements meet the required nominal values. Case 2 is not desired because even though the process variation is small keeping it in control, the average measurements are far from nominal, not meeting the requirements. Case 3 may be seen as desirable or not, depending on the customers concerns. Clearly, we see that the process varies more than the specification, but overall, it meets the average requirements. Case 4 is not desired because of excess process variation and deviation from nominal.

Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting


The Cp and Cpk values for a feature will be displayed on the bottom of the Range, Average and Run chart. The # in each group value will change the sample size for Range and Average charts. There must be more than 5 sets of data to create a chart.

429
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical


OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this section, the student will be able to set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC GRAPH to work together automatically.

PRACTICAL Exercise
Modify the Learn/Execute Program
1 2 3

From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/ EXECUTE. Click NO when prompted to save changes. Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools. Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct). Click OK.
FIGURE 44-1 Choose File type

From the FILE menu, select OPEN. Click NO to save changes. Select Base Plate Training. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 44-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

431
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5 6 7


Left mouse click on END OF FILE to highlight the last command. From the MISC menu, select EXPORT DATA < EXPORT DATA. Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

Allow user to change all user fields = unchecked. Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked. Allow the operator to modify the serial number = unchecked. Auto Increment Serial number = unchecked. Serial Number template = unchecked. Click OK.
FIGURE 44-3 Auto Increment Serial number

NOTE: Un-checking all the parameters will allow the report to use the same serial number of the Graphical Text Report. 8

From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

Creating Test Data for SPC Graph


1

From the TOOLBUILDER menu, select TEST DATA.

Click the YES button to open CAM2 SPC Graph.


FIGURE 44-4 Start SPC Graph

NOTE: This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

432
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a SPC Graph Template


1

SPC Graph displays the list of parts.

FIGURE 44-5 SPC Graph

On the left side of the screen is the PARTS LIST window. Double left mouse click on BASE PLATE TRAINING.

FIGURE 44-6 Training CAD to Part

The PART window is added on top of the PARTS LIST window and displays a tree that contains the folders of measurement files and picture files. A Master Template is loaded into the canvas (right screen).

Click on the plus sign (+) next to MASTER TEMPLATES to display all templates. 433
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Double left mouse click on COLOR TEMPLATE 3.AG2.

NOTE: Color Template 3 is the landscape format with the header at the top of the page. 5

Double left mouse click on the FAROSETUP.EMF file under the DRAWINGS list.

FIGURE 44-7 Adding the View

The picture is now added to the canvas. Click and drag the picture around to place it on the canvas. Click and drag the corners of the picture to change the size.

Double left mouse click on the FAROSETUP1 measurement set under the MEASURMENTS folder. The measurement set expands and shows all the features in the measurement file.

FIGURE 44-8 Part List Tree

434
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Adding Run Charts to the template X C_FLATNESS001 C_PERPENDICULARITY001 C_STRAIGHTNESS001 C_CONCENTRICITY001 M_CIRCLE001 M_CIRCLE003 M_CIRCLE005 M_CIRCLE007 C_BOLT_CIRCLE C_POSITION001 C_POSITION003 C_POSITION005 C_POSITION007 1 2

Dia

Form X X X X

MMC

X X X X X X X X X X X

Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree. From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Chart Type = Run Chart. Feature/Parameter = see Table. Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart. Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 44-9 Run Chart

Adding Range Charts to the template 1

Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

435
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Chart Type = Range Chart. Feature/Parameter = see Table. # in Each Group = 2. Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart. Click OK to add the chart to the template.
FIGURE 44-10 Range Chart

Adding Average Charts to the template 1 2


Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree. From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Chart Type = Average Chart. Feature/Parameter = see Table. # in Each Group = 2. Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart. Click OK to add the chart to the template.
FIGURE 44-11 Average Chart

Align Icons
You may want to experiment with the ALIGN commands in the OBJECT MENU < ALIGN. These align tables/charts to the table/chart you select last. For example, if you wanted to align the centers of a series of tables in a vertical column, you would: 1 2 3

Hold the SHIFT key down and select the tables that should align to the same horizontal position. Continue to hold down the SHIFT key and select the table that is at the correct position. From the OBJECT menu, select ALIGN < ALIGN HORIZONTAL CENTERS. 436

Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Saving the Report 1

When you are finished arranging the tables and the CAD view on the canvas, save it as a report.

From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS. Select PART TEMPLATE. Click SAVE.

FIGURE 44-12 Saving a Part Template

This is called a Part Template because you may use one part template for many measurement sessions. 2

Save the file.

File name = Page 1. Save as type = AG2Doc Files (*.ag2). Click SAVE.
FIGURE 44-13 Save As

From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

Adding a Preview to the Program


Return to CAM2 Measure Learn/Execute Offline Programing Dialog Box. 1 2

Click on GRAPHICAL TEXT REPORT. From the EDIT menu, select DELETE.

437
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > SAVE SPC GRAPH REPORT.

Part Name = Base Plate Training. Part Template = Page 1. Click OK.
FIGURE 44-14 Adding an SPC Graph report

Name the temporary .jpg file.

File name = Page 1. File of type = (*.jpg). Click SAVE.

FIGURE 44-15 Save JPG

NOTE: The .jpg file is a temporary file that CAM2 Measure creates in order to display the report. 5 6

Click on SAVE GRAPHICAL REPORT. Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

Allow user to change all user fields = unchecked. Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked. Allow the operator to modify the serial number = unchecked. Auto Increment Serial number = unchecked. Serial Number template = unchecked. Click OK.
FIGURE 44-16 Auto Increment

438
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7 8


From the FILE menu, select SAVE. From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

439
Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present feature reducibility and the differences between the coordinate systems. After completing this section, the student will be able to create coordinate systems with fewer constructions.

Feature Reducibility
Fill in the chart below: Plane Arc Line Point

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

Ellipse

Line

441
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Plane Plane Line Point

Point

Rectangular Slot

Round Slot

Sphere

3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems


Each coordinate system levels the plane (XY, YZ or XZ), rotates the axis (X, Y or Z) and sets the origin. 3-2-1 means that three points define a plane that sets one axis, two points define a line that locks a second axis, and one point defines an origin. There are 1 factors that distinguish the eight different coordinate systems.

The selected features (plane, line or point).

2 How the features are used.

442
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Coordinate Systems
Coordinate Systems using a Plane, Line, and Point in Different Ways The origin. Coordinate System uses the point selected as the

Z Y X

FIGURE 45-1 3-2-1 Coordinate System

The Coordinate System projects the point selected to the plane for the origin.

Z Y X

FIGURE 45-2 Separate Origin Coordinate System

Coordinate System projects the point The selected to the line selected for the origin.

Z Y X

FIGURE 45-3 Perpendicular Coordinate System

443
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Coordinate Systems using a Plane and Two Lines The Coordinate System creates the origin from the intersection of the two lines. The first line defines the direction of the X-axis.

Z Y X

FIGURE 45-4 Line/Line Coordinate System

The Coordinate System creates the origin from the intersection of the plane and the second line selected. Notice that the second line must intersect the plane at a single point and cannot lie on the plane.

Z Y X

FIGURE 45-5 Bore Coordinate System

Other Coordinate Systems using Different Features The Coordinate System uses the first plane selected as the XY plane, the second plane intersects the first to create the Xaxis, and the third plane intersects the other two to create the origin.
3

Z Y X 2

FIGURE 45-6 3 Plane Coordinate System

444
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 The __________ Coordinate System sets the origin at the first point, the +X-axis from the first point to the second, and the +XY plane on the third point.

3 Z Y 1 X 2

FIGURE 45-7 3 Point Coordinate System

The Coordinate System sets the origin at the midpoint of the line selected.
1

Z Y X 2

FIGURE 45-8 Midpoint Coordinate System

Change Coordinate System Discussion


Rotation allows the coordinate system to spin about any axis or line. Use the hand rule to determine which rotation direction is positive. Point the thumb of your right hand along the positive axis or line direction. The direction your fingers wrap is the positive direction of rotation. Translation allows you to move the coordinate system to a specific point in space, either from a previous coordinate system or to any other ____________ feature or along a line.

445
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Intermediate Alignments


It is possible to create multiple coordinate systems and switch between them. A 3-2-1 Coordinate System may be constructed using a slot. Two circles may be used in place of a line for a coordinate system. The Translation function can: Move the origin to a specific feature. Move the origin to a specific XYZ value. Offset the origin a specific XYZ distance from a feature.

446
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical


PRACTICAL Exercise
Start with a new file and load the correct part preferences to work on this practical. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-1 Drawing Units

From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 46-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK to exit.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to +/-0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to CAM2 Measure.

447
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 5

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD. Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 46-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 6

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 46-4 Adding CAD Parts

448
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

FIGURE 46-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

Measuring the Alignment Features


Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you though the measurement of the three circles. 1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-6 Probes

449
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle. Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 46-7 Measurement Template

Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template. Click on Circle 1 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 46-8 Circle 1

450
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001. Click OK to accept. Circle 1 highlights red.

FIGURE 46-9 Circle 1 Results

Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template. Click on Circle 3 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 46-10 Circle 3

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE003. Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 highlights red.

FIGURE 46-11 Circle 3 Results

451
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template. Click on Circle 7 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 46-12 Circle 7

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE007. Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 highlights red.

FIGURE 46-13 Circle 7 Results

Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

FIGURE 46-14 Measurement Template

452
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plan has not been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command. 11

The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-15 Select Plane

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle. 12

Measure Circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 46-16 Measure Circle 1

NOTE: Since two features are being measured at once (plane and circle), move the SMR to the center of the hole and pull up and away from the top surface for compensation. 13 14

Take a look at the results and click OK to continue. For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-17 Select Plane

453
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 15

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 46-18 Measure Circle 3

16

For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-19 Select Plane

17

Measure Circle 7.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 46-20 Measure Circle 7

454
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 46-21 Measurement Results

Setting an Iterative Alignment


1

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007. Set Weights = unchecked. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-22 Iterative Alignment

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

455
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Take a look at the results.

Check the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance. Notice the error between each of the measured circles and its associated nominal. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 46-23 Iterative Alignment Results

3-2-1
1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-24 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

456
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure the plane on top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-25 Measure XY Plane

Take a look at the results.

Label = BASE_PLANE. If everything looks good, press the to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-26 Plane Results

5 6

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE. Measure Sphere C. Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-27 Measure Sphere C

457
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_C. If everything looks good, press the to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-28 Sphere Results

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-29 Probes

9 10

From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE. The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected. Offset = 0. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-30 Select Plane

458
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B. Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-31 Measure X Axis

12

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE_FRONT. If everything looks good, press the to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-32 Line Results

13

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = M_LINE_FRONT. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C. Select the CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-33 3-2-1 Coordinate System

459
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 14

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the 3-2-1 coordinate system is the centerpoint of the sphere.

Separate Origin
1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SEPARATE ORIGIN.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT. Origin = M_SPHERE_C. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-34 Separate Origin Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Separate Origin coordinate system is the center point of the sphere projected to the base plane.

Perpendicular Intersect
1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < PERPENDICULAR INTERSECT.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT. Origin = M_SPHERE_C. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-35 Perpendicular Intersect Coordinate System

460
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the perpendicular intersection coordinate system is the center point of the sphere projected to the line.

Bore
1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-36 Select Plane

Measure Circle 10.

Take four to five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move above and to the center of the circle and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 46-37 Measure Circle 10

461
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE010_I. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-38 Cylinder Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < BORE.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT. Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown. First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C. Second Point on Line = M_CIRCLE010_I. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-39 Bore Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Bore coordinate system is at the intersection of the second line with the plane.

462
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Line-Line
1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE-LINE.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT. Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown. First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C. Second Point on Line = M_CIRCLE010_I. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-40 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Line-Line coordinate system is at the intersection of the two lines projected to the plane.

Midpoint
1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-41 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE. 463


Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

Measure Sphere B.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-42 Measure Sphere B

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_B. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-43 Sphere Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < MIDPOINT.

Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Click on the toggle button next to the LINE DEFINED X AXIS toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON X AXIS and SECOND POINT ON X AXIS dropdown. First Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_C. Second Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_B. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-44 Midpoint Coordinate System

464
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the X-axis is positive in the direction that the spheres were selected. The origin is the midpoint of the line projected to the plane.

3 Point
1 2

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE. Measure Sphere D.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-45 Measure Sphere D

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_D. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-46 Sphere Results

465
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3 POINT.

Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C. Point on +X = M_SPHERE_B. Point on +XY = M_SPHERE_D. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-47 3 Point Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the XY plane is defined by the three points. The X axis is defined by a line between sphere C and sphere B. The origin is at the centerpoint of sphere C.

3 Plane
1

From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

Select a Point = M_SPHERE_C. Click the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown. First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D. Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-48 Construct Plane Perpendicular

466
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE_LEFT. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-49 Plane Results

From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

Select a Point = M_SPHERE_B. Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown. First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D. Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_B. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-50 Construct Plane Perpendicular

467
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE_FRONT. Click OK.

FIGURE 46-51 Plane Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3 PLANE.

Select XY Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. Select Plane 2 = C_PLANE_FRONT. Select Plane 3 = C_PLANE_LEFT. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-52 3 Plane Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the intersection of Base plane and Front plane defines the X-axis and the origin is at the intersection of the three planes.

Set Active Coordinate System


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SET ACTIVE.

Set Active = C_COORDSYS007 (the 3 Point coordinate system). Click OK.


FIGURE 46-53 Set Active Coordinate System

468
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Change Coordinate System


Rotation 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < ROTATION.

Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS007. Line Defined axis = +Z_C_COORDSYS007. by = 20.2 degrees. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-54 Rotate Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the coordinate system was rotated so that the X axis is oriented parallel to the front of the base. Translation 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION.

Select X Origin = M_SPHERE_C. X Offset = -15.0. Select Y Origin = M_SPHERE_B. Y Offset = -15.0. Select Z Origin = M_CIRCLE010_I. Z Offset = -12.0. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS009. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 46-55 Translate Coordinate System

469
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 2

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin was translated to the corner of the part using the X value of Sphere C, the Y value of Sphere B, and the Z value of Circle 10.

470
Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to establish coordinate systems when information on the datums are limited. After completing this section, the student will be able to use constructions to establish coordinate systems.

Calculated Coordinate System


There will be situations in which the datum information is sufficient to define a coordinate system (plane, line, and point), but the origin is not located at the datums. The datums are structured such that using a rotation and translation technique would be extremely difficult, if not impossible. In the situation described below, a coordinate system will be established using the indicated datums. The print also indicates that locations should be used to define the datums instead of directly measuring the datum features. The information from this print will be used to construct datum features from the specified targets.
A
35.35 50

A1

B
B1 C1 50

135

10 A3 A2 B2

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.01 1
THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

63

FINSH REQUIRED

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

Armed with Quality

TITLE

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

FIGURE 47-1 Print with Datum Targets

471
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

CAD=Part
This function requires that some type of coordinate system on the part has been constructed using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current coordinate system equal to the CAD or Nominal coordinate system (also called the world coordinate system) and moves all the measured data to the CAD coordinate system. The measurements are then overlaid onto the CAD or nominal data. To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the coordinate system of the CAD. In many cases, the origin of the coordinate system will not be on the part, and a translation or rotation will be necessary to get the coordinate system to the correct location.

Constructions
2 Offset Line
This function constructs a (typically a coordinate axis) where there is a known offset. When a part defines a datum with two target location and the points do not lie on the datum line, the Construct Line, 2 Offset command may be used to construct the line. This command may also be used as rotate function by entering the offset values instead of the rotation angle. The offset direction is always to the right side of the two points.

FIGURE 47-2 2 Point 2 Offset Line

472
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 Offset Plane
This function constructs a plane (typically a coordinate plane) where there is more than one for the points. When a part defines a datum with three target locations and the points do not lie on the datum plane, the Construct Plane, 3 Offset command may be used to construct the plane. The plane is constructed above or below the selected points. The order that the points are selected is used to determine the offset direction. Use the right-hand rule to determine the offset direction.
3

FIGURE 47-3 3 Point 3 Offset Plane

Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate Systems


There are two possible solutions in the three-point, three-offset plane construction. Use the right hand rule to determine the correct offset direction. The CAD=PART function needs to be performed after the translation.

473
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical


PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Start with a new file and load the correct part preferences for this practical.
A
35.35 50

A1

B
B1 C1 50

135

10 A3 A2 B2

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.01 1
THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

63 FINSH REQUIRED

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

Armed with Quality

TITLE

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

FIGURE 48-1 Print with Datum Targets

1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 48-2 Drawing Units

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

475
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 48-3 Load Tolerances

5 6

Click OK to accept the preferences. From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 48-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

476
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 48-5 Adding CAD Parts

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

FIGURE 48-6 FARO_Demo_Part3.igs

477
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Nominal Alignments on the CAD


Constructing Nominal Objects 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL. CAM2 Measure will create a plane with 3 points. Use the mouse to click 3 points on the bottom surface to define a plane for Datum A. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.
FIGURE 48-7 Construct XY Plane

Choose the direction of the plane.

Click the LEFT mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points up. Click the RIGHT mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 48-8 Choose Direction Vector

Take a look at the results.

Label = PLANE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 48-9 Nominal Plane Results

478
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a line with 2 points. Use the mouse to click a point on the bottom surface to define a line for Datum B. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.
FIGURE 48-10 Construct X Axis

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to define the line. 5

Take a look at the results.

Label = LINE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 48-11 Nominal Line Results

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points. Use the mouse to click a point on the bottom surface to define a circle for Datum C. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.
FIGURE 48-12 Construct X Intercept

479
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to define the circle. 7

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001. Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 48-13 Nominal Circle Results

Constructing a Nominal Alignment 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 32-1.

Select a Plane = N_PLANE001. Direction of Plane= +XY. Line Defined axis = N_LINE001. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = N_CIRCLE001. Select NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 48-14 Nominal Coordinate System

Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

NOTE: The coordinate system may not be correct. If the nominal line that defines the X axis is pointing in the wrong direction, flip the direction of the nominal line. Flipping Vectors 1 2

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Select N_LINE001. 480

Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3 4


Click the FLIP VECTOR button. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Construct the Plane


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 48-15 Probes

2 3

From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE. Measure Sphere A.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 48-16 Measure Sphere A

481
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_A. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the results.

FIGURE 48-17 Sphere Results

Measure Sphere D.

Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 48-18 Measure Sphere D

Take a look at the results.

Label = SPHERE_D. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 48-19 Sphere Results

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

482
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

Measure a surface point on top of the base near the A3 target.

Take three or four points by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

10 A3

FIGURE 48-20 Measure Surface Point

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT_A3. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 48-21 Point Results

Construct the Plane


Construct the XY plane with three offsets using the known Z values on the table. Datum Features X M_SURFPT_A3 M_SPHERE_D M_SPHERE_A -135.0 50.0 -50.0 Y Z 25.0 35.4 35.4

483
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < 3 OFFSETS.

Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A. First Point Offset = 35.4. Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D. Second Point Offset = 35.4. Select Third Point = M_SURFPT_A3. Third Point Offset = 25.0. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 48-22 Construct Plane 3 Offsets

Click OK to accept the plane. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: There are two solutions to the constructed plane. Depending on the selection order of the features, the constructed plane will be above or below the features. Using the right hand rule, selecting a counter clockwise direction places the plane on one side, selecting clockwise direction puts it on the other side.

Construct the Line


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < 2 OFFSETS.

Select a Plane = C_PLANE001. Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A. First Point Offset = -50.0. Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D. Second Point Offset = 50.0. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 48-23 Construct Line 2 Offsets

Click OK to accept the line. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

484
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 NOTE: There are two possible solutions to the 2 Offset line. The offset is to the right of the line looking from the first selected point to the second selected point. The location of the line depends on which point is selected first.

Complete the Coordinate System


1

From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 32-1.

Select a Plane = C_PLANE001. Direction of Plane = +XY. Line Defined Axis = C_LINE001. Direction of Axis = +X. Select Origin = M_SPHERE_A. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 48-24 3-2-1 Coordinate System

2 3

Click OK to accept the coordinate system. From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION.

Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001. X Offset = 135.0. Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001. Y Offset = 50.0. Select Z Origin = C_COORDSYS001. Z Offset = -35.4. Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001. Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button. Click OK.
FIGURE 48-25 Translate Coordinate System

485
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4 5


Click OK to accept the coordinate system. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART.

Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002. Nominal Coordinate System = N_COORDSYS001. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 48-26 CAD=Part Alignment

Click OK to accept the alignment. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

Verify Alignment
1

From the MEASURE menu, select INSPECT XYZ. Verify that the origin is in the bottom left corner of the base by moving the SMR over the part and watching the computer screen. Press the HOME key or the ESC key to end the command.

2 3

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Complete the missing data on the table. The initial known values given to you should be exact. Datum Features X M_SURFPT_A3 M_SPHERE_D M_SPHERE_A -135.0 50.0 -50.0 Y Z 25.0 35.4 35.4

486
Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments


OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use nominal and surface data to align a coordinate system. After completing this section, the student will know how to use the Feature and Surface Point Alignment.

This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART alignments. They vary from one another by the features that may be used and how the error is distributed in the alignment. The part datum structure and the goal of the measurement session determines the best alignment.

Feature Alignment
Feature alignment uses three point-reducible features to give a more exact alignment without best-fitting. The measurements are only as good as the alignment. An alignment with large error will yield poor measurement results. When the alignment error is high, the measured alignment features do not match their nominals. The only way to troubleshoot high alignment error is to create an CAD to PART alignment. One of the easiest ways to do that is by doing a Feature alignment. A Feature alignment is accomplished by selecting a Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary feature. The Feature alignment takes the Primary feature and matches it with its nominal.
2
3

1
2

487
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Then it takes the Secondary Feature and rotates it into the line between the Primary nominal and the Secondary nominal.

Finally, CAM2 Measure X rotates the Tertiary feature about that same line until the tertiary feature is in the same plane as the Tertiary nominal.

488
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 The results are as follows: The Primary feature has zero deviation. The Secondary feature has deviation along the line from primary to secondary nominals. The Tertiary feature has deviation in the plane of all three nominal features.

Iterative Alignment with Surface Points


The previous training courses introduce the Iterative, or Best Fit alignment. Those practical exercises use simple point reducible features. CAM2 Measure X is able to use Surface Points and an associated nominal surface for the alignment. When using surfaces to align to a part at least three surface regions that are to each other must be selected. The 3-2-1 roughly requirement (plane, line, point) must be satisfied when arranging the surface points. A minimum of 6 surface points should be taken when measuring a nominal surface for an alignment.

Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values


When to Use This Technique
When the print specifies that only some of the values are used for a particular datum. to a When one of the datums is a round slot that is coordinate axis. That coordinate axis is not used in the calculation. When a bore center line is used as a datum and the center line is parallel to a coordinate axis. When a surface that is parallel to a coordinate plane is used as a datum and no surface is provided. When one of the alignment features has a very error in one or

two coordinate axis and there is enough information to fully constrain.

489
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Watch Out!
If you dont specify enough values for each coordinate axis, then the part will be . You must shoot for a 3-2-1 situation where: At least 3 Points use one Axis (For example: X) At least 2 Points use a second Axis (For example: Y) At least 1 Point must use the last Axis (Z) If the alignment is under constrained, then the alignment may there is more than one solution. Due to best-fit limitations, at least one point must use axes. the coordinate because

Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part Alignments


The number of points selected in an Iterative alignment will have an impact on the processing time for the alignment. The Feature alignment error at each point may be viewed in Review Features. The surface point can fall off the surface causing the alignment error to grow larger rather than solving.

490
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical


This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART alignments. They vary from one another by how the error is distributed in the alignment and the features that may be used. REMEMBER: The alignment used will be determined by the part datum structure and the goal of the measurement session.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment


1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-1 Drawing Units

3 4

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES. From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-2 Load Tolerances

Click OK to accept the preferences.

491
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 X Circle 9 Circle 1 Circle 3 6

Y 0.0 70.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Diameter 100.0 20.0 20.0

0.0 0.00 70.0

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch. Nest = 0.25 diameter pin nest. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-3 Probes

7 8 9

From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE. Select CIRCLE from the Add a Nominal drop-down window. Click the KEY IN button .

X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 100.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-4 Construct Circle Enter Values

492
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 10

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE009. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 50-5 Circle results

11

Click the KEY IN button

X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-6 Construct Circle Enter Values

12

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 50-7 Circle results

493
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13

Click the KEY IN button

X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00. I = 0, J = 0, K = 1. Coordinate System = *WORLD*. Select the NOMINAL toggle button. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-8 Construct Circle Enter Values

14

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE003. Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 50-9 Circle results

15

Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not been measured a plane; however, CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command. This is accomplished by selecting NONE in the Select a Plane dialog 16

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = NONE. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-10 Select Plane

494
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 17

Measure Circle 9.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-11 Measure Circle 1

18 19

Click OK to accept the circle. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = NONE. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-12 Select Plane

20

Measure Circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-13 Measure Circle 1

21

Click OK to accept the circle.

495
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 22

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = NONE. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-14 Select Plane

23

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-15 Measure Circle 3

24 25

Click OK to accept the circle. From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

Primary Point = M_CIRCLE009_I. Secondary Point = M_CIRCLE001_I. Tertiary Point = M_CIRCLE003_I. Scale Option = None. Click OK.
FIGURE 50-16 Feature Alignment

26 27

Click OK to accept the alignment. From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Select M_CIRCLE009. View Style = Tabular. Enter the Deviation values for X, Y and Z into the following table. Repeat for M_CIRCLE001 and M_CIRCLE003. 496

Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 Deviation X M_CIRCLE009_I M_CIRCLE001_I M_CIRCLE003_I NOTE: Circle 9 will have zero deviation, Circle 1 will have deviation along the Y axis, and Circle 3 will have deviation along the X and Y axis. Deviation Y Deviation Z

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points

FARO Standard Demonstration Part - Shell ISO View


FIGURE 50-17 FARO Shell

Secure the black plastic shell on top of the plate.

497
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 1

From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = Shell1.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 50-18 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer. 2

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = Shell1.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-19 Adding CAD Parts

Click NO to save changes.

498
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-20 Probes

5 6

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT. Measure point 1.

Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.
1

FIGURE 50-21 Measure Surface Point

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the feature.

FIGURE 50-22 Point Results

499
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 8

Measure point 2. Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.
2

FIGURE 50-23 Measure Surface Point

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT002. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-24 Point Results

10

Measure point 3.

Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-25 Measure Surface Point

500
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT003. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-26 Point Results

12

Measure point 4.

Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.
4

FIGURE 50-27 Measure Surface Point

13

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT004. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-28 Point Results

501
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 14

Measure point 5.

Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.
5

FIGURE 50-29 Measure Surface Point

15

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT005. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.
FIGURE 50-30 Point Results

16

Measure point 6.

Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key. Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-31 Measure Surface Point

502
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 17

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT006. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-32 Point Results

Using Surfaces as Nominals


1 2 3 4

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES. Click on the NOMINALS tab. Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT003. Click the FROM SCREEN button Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model. .

FIGURE 50-33 Surface 1

5 6

Click OK to accept the nominal surface. Select M_SURFPNT004 through M_SURFPNT005.

503
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Click the FROM SCREEN button

Using the mouse select the surface on the side of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-34 Surface 2

8 9 10

Click OK to accept the nominal surface. Select M_SURFPNT006. Click the FROM SCREEN button ,

Using the mouse select the surface on the side of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-35 Surface 3

11 12

Click OK to accept the nominal surface. Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

504
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 13

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT006. Set Weights = unchecked. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-36 Iterative Alignment

The alignment calculations stop when the smallest error, between the measured points and the nominal surfaces is found. 14 15

Click OK to accept the alignment. From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE. Touch anywhere on the part and press the INSERT key. Pull away from the part and press the HOME key.

16

Take 2 more points on the FARO shell.

NOTE: Surface point alignment is appropriate when aligning to a part with less than three, or no point-reducible features that have CAD surfaces.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values


In this case, the X value of circle 1, the Y value of circle 3 and 7, and the Z values of the surface points will be used to construct an alignment. 1 2

From the FILE menu, select NEW. Click NO to save changes.

Drawing Units = Millimeters. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-37 Drawing Units

505
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 3

From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD. Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-38 Load Tolerances

4 5

Click OK to accept the preferences. From the FILE menu, select select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

Click ADD Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory. Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs. Click OPEN. Click TRANSLATE. Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 50-39 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

506
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 6

From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm). Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm. Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-40 Adding CAD Parts

From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

FIGURE 50-41 FARO_Demo_Part4.igs

507
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measurement Template
1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-42 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle. Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 50-43 Measurement Template

Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template. Using the mouse click on Circle 1 of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-44 Circle 1

508
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE001. Click OK to accept. Circle 1 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 50-45 Circle 1 Results

Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template. Using the mouse click on Circle 3 on the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-46 Circle 3

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE003. Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 50-47 Circle 3 Results

509
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template. Using the mouse click on Circle 7 on the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-48 Circle 7

Take a look at the results.

Label = CIRCLE007. Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 50-49 Circle 7 Results

Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

FIGURE 50-50 Measurement Template

10

Click OK to measure the three circles.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not 510
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 been measured. However; CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command. This is accomplished by selecting NONE in the Select a Plane dialog 11

The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = NONE. Click OK.

Notice that Circle 1 is highlighted red. This is to guide to the correct circle. 12

Measure circle 1.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-51 Measure Circle 1

NOTE: Since you are measuring two features at once (plane and circle), make sure you move the SMR to the center of the hole and pull up and away from the top surface for compensation. 13 14

Click OK to accept the circle. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-52 Select Plane

511
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 15

Measure Circle 3.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-53 Measure Circle 3

16 17

Click OK to accept the circle. The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Select a Plane = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-54 Select Plane

18

Measure Circle 7.

Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key. Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-55 Measure Circle 7

19

Click OK to accept the circle.

512
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Using Surface Points


1

From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

SMR = 1.5 inch SMR. Nest = None. Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-56 Probes

From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the INSERT key in a small triangular pattern. Pull off the surface and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-57 Surface Point 1

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT001. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-58 Point Results

513
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 4

Continue measuring surface points.

Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the INSERT key in a small triangular pattern. Pull off the surface and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-59 Surface Point 2

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT002. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the point.

FIGURE 50-60 Point Results

Continue measuring surface points.

Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the INSERT key in a small triangular pattern. Pull off the surface and press the HOME key.
FIGURE 50-61 Surface Point 3

514
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 7

Take a look at the results.

Label = SURFPT003. If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results. If it doesnt look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-62 Point Results

From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

Select M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, M_SURFPT003. Click on the NOMINALS tab. Click on the FROM SCREEN button .

Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.
FIGURE 50-63 Review Features

9 10

Click the OK button to accept the nominal surface. Click OK the exit REVIEW FEATURES.

515
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 11

From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

Select the M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE007_I, M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, and M_SURFPT003. Set Weights = checked. Scale Option = None. Click OK.

FIGURE 50-64 Iterative Alignment

12

In the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT USED VALUES dialog box, change the weights of the three circles.

Left mouse click on the check marks to turn off the Y and Z values for M_CIRCLE001. Left mouse click on the check marks to turn off the X and Z values for M_CIRCLE003 and M_CIRCLE007. Click OK and wait for the alignment to solve.
FIGURE 50-65 Set Weights

NOTE: The surface points cannot be weighted. The nominal surface constrains the points to the surface normal to the surface. 13

Click OK to accept the aligment.

NOTE: Neglecting the Z values of the measured circles will only consider their X and Y location for the Iterative alignment. The surface points lock the Z values.

516
Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008

Answer Key
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . large 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . horizontal 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blink 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot keys 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . buttons 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Command 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repeatability 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accurate 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deviations 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . corrects 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repeatability 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repeatability 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Features 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Features 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Plane 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . surfaces 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . datum 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . several 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMM 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligned 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . established 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . point reducible 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurements 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . same 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changed 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . additional 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disturbed 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XY 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YZ 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XZ 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perpendicular 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Point 196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home in 196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cosine error 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arcs 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circles 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D lines 215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slots 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deviation 286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infinite 517

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 286 286 286 286 286 286 286 286 286 309 309 310 310 323 323 323 323 323 371 405 405 405 406 406 406 406 417 418 427 427 427 428 428 428 442 443 443 443 444 444 444 445 445 445 445 471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interfere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurement instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precision ..........................................................2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perpendicular Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-Line Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MidPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target 518

Basic Measurement Training Workbook Version 1.0 - January 2008 472 473 487 489 489 489 489 490 490 490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . orthogonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . under constrained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all

519

Contact Information
For Technical Support
World Wide Web site: www.faro.com E-mail: support@faro.com Telephone Number: 800.736.2771

For Sales Inquiries


Electronic Product Catalog on www.faro.com E-mail: info@faro.com Telephone Number: 800.736.0234, extension 2265

For Training or Technical Services


E-mail: training@faro.com Telephone Number: 800.736.0234, extension 1111

S-ar putea să vă placă și